JP6535935B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  There is known a gaming machine in which the timing at which reach effect is executed does not change depending on the type of jackpot symbol (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-057801

However, when the timing at which the specific effect such as the reach effect is performed is fixed, the interest may be reduced.
The present invention has been made in view of the above-described point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which does not reduce interest by fixing the timing at which a specific effect is executed.

(1) The present invention has been made to solve the problems described above, the variable display (for example, performed by the CPU 103, the special symbol variation processing of step S112 shown in FIG. 13) carried out, Yu technique It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a probability change state determined by the process of determining the jackpot type in step S244 shown in FIG. 20, which is executed by the CPU 103) The game control means to control (for example, CPU103 etc which executes the main processing which is shown in Figure 11), the production control means which controls the execution of the effect (for example, CPU120 for production control which executes the main control of production control which is shown in Figure 25) When, wherein the game control means, gaming state (e.g., probability variation state to be executed by the CPU 103) game state of controlling the Means (e.g., a winning time of random number determination process of FIG. 16 (step S220) CPU 103 executes a process of determining a jackpot type of step S409 in, etc.), a variable display pattern of variable display, a plurality of types of variable display pattern (e.g., change pattern like shown in FIG. 5) includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining the noise Zureka (e.g., a winning time of random number determination process shown in FIG. 16 (CPU 103 to perform the step S220)) and, the, the effect control means, the specific effect suggests whether controlled before Symbol advantageous conditions (for example, performed by the effect control CPU 120, the step S605 in the variable display in effect process shown in FIG. 35 (step S172) a specific effect, etc.) to be performed in a special effect repeating predetermined effect, it is possible to perform, the game state control hand Among the plurality of types of the advantageous state is controllable to any beneficial state, after the advantageous state is completed, can be controlled to a predetermined state, the variable display pattern determining means, the advantageous condition in the predetermined state after the completion of the advantageous state of the types different timings in accordance with (e.g., shown in FIG. 7, timing, etc. to perform a specific effect, such as Leach timing corresponding to the jackpot type), the variable display pattern and can determine the specific effect on the running available-for specific variable display pattern (for example, performed by the CPU 103, to determine the variation category in variation category determination processing in step S412 of FIG. 17, determines a variation pattern Possible), and the effect control means determines that the variable display pattern is the specific variable display pattern in the predetermined state. If the the without special effect said specific effect, the a special effect without the specific effect, Ru determinable der whether to perform one of the.

  According to such a gaming machine, by not fixing the timing at which the specific effect is executed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not reduce the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific effect execution means restricts the execution of the specific effect when the timing is not in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 32). Execution of a specific effect may be restricted by the effect control pattern set by the effect control pattern set (step S532) shown.

  According to such a gaming machine, generation of a specific effect can be intended and determined.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the specific effect is performed based on a first specific effect (for example, based on the fluctuation category PA3 or PB3 shown in FIG. Normal reach effect to be played) and a second specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executed by the effect control CPU 120) having a higher degree of expectation than the first specific effect (for example, variation category PA4, PA5, PB4 or PB5 shown in FIG. 5) And the specific effect execution means may execute the first specific effect or the second specific effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to limit unintended specific effects.

(4) In the game machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the specific effect performed in the special state is notified (for example, the step shown in FIG. 35 performed by the CPU 120 for effect control) The display etc. of the reach history to the image display device 5 in S605-1 may be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can confirm the executed specific effect, and the interest can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the above (4), the gaming machine which limits the execution of the specific effect which is executed and notified in the special state (for example, step S53252 shown in FIG. 33 which is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control) In the process of determining the reach effect type of, the reach effect type may not be determined for the reach history by referring to the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest by not executing the specific effect once executed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, when the power-off signal shown in FIG. 2 is received from the power supply substrate) The notification of the specific effect is restored on the assumption that the specific effect has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the image display device 5 shown in FIG. The reach history display for notifying that the specific effect has been performed four times (MAX) may be restored in the variable display restoration process S529 of FIG.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed more than a predetermined number of times after recovery from a power failure.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the specific effect is not executed and the specific effect is not executed. Recovery (for example, shown in FIG. 38B, which is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control, as a variable display of reach history display for notifying that the specific effect performed on the image display device 5 is not executed. In the recovery processing S529, recovery etc. may be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest by preventing the reach from being executed even once after recovery.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), after being controlled to the special state, the specific effect is not executed until the fluctuation of the variable display reaches a predetermined fluctuation number ( For example, in the process of step S4122 in the variation category determination (step S412) in FIG. 17 executed by the CPU 103, a determination table not determining the specific effect may be selected.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to continuous specific effects. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of scenarios (big hit types that define the execution timing of the specific effect) for executing the specific effect until the change of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of changes.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8), the jackpot type is a first jackpot type (for example, as shown in FIG. A big hit type that is a big hit type that executes once, and a second big hit type that executes a specific effect a second number of times that is greater than the first number (for example, shown in FIG. Specific effect (for example, the specific effect performed at the 30th time of reach timing 1 in the big hit 1 shown in FIG. 7) which is executed first in the second number, The timing may be earlier than the specific effect (for example, the specific effect performed at the 14th time of the reach timing 10 in the jackpot 1 shown in FIG. 7) performed first in one time.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if it is a jackpot type in which the number of specific effects is executed is small, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the early termination of the execution of the specific effects.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by one mode of the present invention. It is a block diagram which illustrates the various control boards mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view which illustrates the contents of a production control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates the 1st change category and change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 2nd change category and change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 3rd change category and change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 4th change category and change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 5th change category and change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the 6th change category and change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of a display result determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the structure of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change category judging. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the composition of the 1st change category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the composition of the 2nd change category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the composition of the 3rd change category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the composition of the 4th change category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the composition of the 5th change category determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the composition of the 6th change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of at the time of fluctuation game state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power failure recovery processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variable display recovery processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a production control pattern set. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reach production classification determination. It is a figure which illustrates the reach production classification determination ratio table corresponding to reach history. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of waiting processing per special drawing. It is a figure showing the 1st example of a display of reach history display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the reach history display by which the power failure restoration was carried out. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the variable display which will not be in a reach state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the variable display which will be in a reach state.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing a layout of main members. Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machines") 1 are roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2 It consists of three. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

In the lower part of the game area of the game board 2, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member.
The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter.

  In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. What is detected by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the "winning", winning in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "starting winning", and in particular, winning in the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning of the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  While a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A), the first special view reserve memory number (described later ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the first special figure game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A or the image display device 5 A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as (described later) is satisfied.

  In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the second start winning (the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B), and the second special view reserve memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), a second special figure game (described later) executed in second special symbol display device 4B or a decorative symbol executed in image display device 5 A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is satisfied. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start When the first start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of the winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) And when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start When the second start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) And when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  The number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the number of first special view pending storages, the number of the second special view pending storages, and the total pending storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as “the number of special view pending storages” or “the number of pending storages” The first special view pending storage number, the second special view pending storage number, and the total pending storage number are either one or two, when simply referred to as “the number of special view pending storages” or “the number of pending storages” It may be pointed at. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning opening that changes to a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by, for example, a solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open, closed).

  As an example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning hole door when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state. The big winning opening is open. The game ball which has passed (entered) the big winning opening in the open state is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, winning to the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 23). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of the prize in the big prize winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three) is greater. That is, the state of the special winning opening (opened state, closed state) greatly influences whether or not the player has an advantage. That is, when the special winning opening is in the open state, more winning balls can be expected compared to when the special winning opening is in the closing state, so when the special winning opening is in the opening state, the special winning opening is in the closing state It is very advantageous for the player compared to

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) may be provided.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or a dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special figures") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is " It is also called "second special view".
Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 4A (same as the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the respective numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbol indicating “−”. Just do it. In addition, a special symbol is not limited to what is comprised from the number which shows "0"-"9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. FIG. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in 7-segment LEDs are set in advance are set as special symbols. You may display it.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) . The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of hold for the first special view game) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories so as to be identifiable by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the first special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new first start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new second start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  On the left side of the game area in the game board 2, a pass gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a common drawing hold display 25C are provided. The game ball having passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball which has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc., similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is plural types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the standard drawing start condition for executing the standard drawing game is satisfied by the detection of the gaming ball by the gate switch 21, the common drawing start condition for permitting the start of the common drawing game is not satisfied ( For example, when the spread game established earlier is in execution), the execution of the spread game is suspended (the spread game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative design) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special drawing game using the second special drawing), variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative designs of “left”, “middle” and “right” are arranged. In response to the start of any one of the first special view game or the second special view game, ie, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any of the first special view or the second special view Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative symbol (finalized decorative symbol, final The stop symbol (also referred to as a stop symbol) is displayed in a stop state. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5 (the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R), the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (correspondence to) the first special drawing game (or the second special drawing game). The finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative design may be, for example, eight kinds of design (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images. The character image may be, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, or a decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or any other arbitrary figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to the respective decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to each alphanumeric character indicating “1” to “8”. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  In addition, the fixed display which is the stop display of the finalized special symbol which is the fixed display which is the variable display result of special symbol (also referred to as the special display display result) and which ends the variable display, the fixed display which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol Stop display to stop the variable display and to display the fixed display which stops the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal pattern which is the variable display result of the normal design (also referred to as common drawing display result) Also referred to as a complete stop indication, a final stop indication, or a derived indication (or simply "derived"). In addition, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol may not necessarily coincide with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time), the decorative symbol The fluctuation time of should be settled.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the determined special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the determined ornament symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the finalized decorative symbol is stopped, and the finalized special symbol may be stopped when the predetermined effect is finished.

  Moreover, you may perform stop display different from complete stop display (final stop display, derivation | leading-out display). For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed has become "0", for example, is displayed while causing slight shaking, expansion and contraction, etc., or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) It includes things that are stopped and displayed without causing time, slight shaking or stretching.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start winning storage display area 5HL and a second start winning storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, as in the first suspension display 25A, a first suspension display is performed to display the first special map suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of first special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, as in the second storage display 25B, a second storage display is performed to display the second special map storage number in a specifiable manner. That is, the number of second special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased due to the establishment of the new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first starting winning storage display A new first hold display is added on the right side of area 5HL (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the first special view hold information for the increased amount, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL If there is another first pending display in the above, the new first pending on the left side of the other first pending display (more than the other left first pending display if there are multiple other first pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first suspension displays in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, when the number of suspension of the first special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduction The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other first pending displays is shifted (shifted) to the erased first pending display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning combination storage display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the second special view game increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second starting winning storage display A new second hold display is added on the left side of area 5HR (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special view hold information, and second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second pending display in the above, the new second pending on the right side of the other second pending display (more than the other right second pending display if there are multiple other second pending displays) A display may be added.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, when the number of holdings of the second special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second of the decrease amount The second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start winning storage display area 5H".

  In addition to the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR, the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second displaying area in the display area of the image display device 5 may be used as a reserve display area. Hold display deleted (moved) from start winning a prize storage display area 5HR (that is, first special view reserve information digested by establishment of first start condition, and second digested by establishment of second start condition) Active display area AHA for displaying a special image representing information including active display (also referred to as digest display, current display, etc.) according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed based on the special figure hold information (Digestion display area, Digestion display area, Present hold display area, Present hold display area, Active hold display area, Active hold display area, Active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR. The area AHA may be disposed at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display or around the active display frame The information corresponding to is displayed by the special image.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the game balls entering any of the general winning openings are detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. Under the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be dischargeable to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be a two transparent photo sensor (parallel sensor pair) disposed parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 ), And four transmission-type photos that combine the two transmission-type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B or the like, for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 8UL and 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speakers 8LL and 8LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper plate (the lower left and right oblique upper portions). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a rendering sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song or the like which is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, a message) or the like which is output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning on the first start winning opening etc). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output in response to an operation act on the push button 31B. In addition, since the operation act on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound outputted in response to the operation act on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the presentation sound is, for example, a sound to notify of requesting an operation action to the push button 31B, a voice, a sound to notify transition to the reach state at the time of transition of the reach state (described later), a voice or These are sounds, voices, and the like for giving notice or suggestion to shift to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is opened, etc. .

  A light emitting member (light emitter) that emits light as effect or decoration is provided on the inside and the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting members are installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless otherwise specified. The lamp 9 may be configured of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotary lamp (for example, a lamp lamp) having a rotary unit. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 etc.) in the game area.

  Although the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9 and the like described above are effect devices that execute effects, the game machine 1 may be provided with other effect devices such as effect models having drive units as effect devices. Good.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each structure is an example, Comprising: You may be arrange | positioned in another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol indicator 20 may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area. Also, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the common view hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine 1, a special drawing game (first special drawing game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start is performed. A special drawing game (second special drawing game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the establishment of the second start condition after the condition is established. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is a loss. In addition, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and lost symbol will be a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B The special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol and a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "big hit", the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The gaming machine 1 executes a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a “round game”) a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the gaming machine 1 opens and closes the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7, and the special winning opening Change the state (opened state, closed state) of For example, the gaming machine 1 changes the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. That is, the gaming machine 1 opens the big winning opening door at the start of the round and keeps the big winning opening open, and then closes the big winning opening door and keeps the big winning opening in a closed state. End the round.

  The gaming machine 1 changes the large winning opening to the open state once in one round (in one round, changes the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state). The gaming machine 1 may change the large winning opening to an open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the gaming machine 1 may change the big winning opening to the open state twice in one round (in the single round, the big winning opening is open → closed → open → closed) And may be changed).

  In addition, the big winning a prize opening is maintained in a closing state instead of the above-mentioned aspect which changes a big winning a prize opening from a closing state to an open state and starts a round (a mode which opens a big winning a prize opening door immediately at the start of a round). It may be an aspect in which the round starts as it is (an aspect in which the big winning opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the gaming machine 1 maintains the large winning opening in the closed state without opening the large winning opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the large winning opening door and maintains the large winning opening in the open state. You may close the big winning opening door and end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) that a round is executed in the jackpot gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always ten times). For example, the predetermined number of times the round is executed in the jackpot gaming state (predetermined number of rounds) is selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of times (for example, 2 times, 8 times, 16 times) It may be the number.

  That is, in the big hit gaming state, the gaming machine 1 selects the number of times of execution of the round is the upper limit number of times (when the predetermined number of times is a fixed number of times, the predetermined number of times of fixing, the predetermined number of times described above If so, repeat the round until it reaches the selected number of times). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number, the gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not win the big winning opening). May be

  In the round, the special winning opening becomes either a predetermined time (opening period) elapses after opening the special winning opening door or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the special winning opening occur. It is kept open for a period of time. The predetermined time (opening period) in which the big winning opening is kept open in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (opening period) in which the big winning opening is kept open in the round is selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of time (for example, 0.1 seconds, 29 seconds) It may be time.

  In the round, the winning opening is kept closed (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case where the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and the round is started, the big winning opening is closed until the predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the big winning opening door is closed. It is kept closed for a period. Also, for example, in a mode in which the round starts while maintaining the big winning opening in a closed state, the big winning opening is in a closing state until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the start of the round. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) in which the big winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) in which the big winning opening is kept closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds) It may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, for example, the gaming machine 1 executes eight rounds of changing the big winning opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big winning opening (29 seconds) → execute each round changing to closed state (3 seconds) 16 times or open the big winning opening state (0.1 second) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 second) 2.) Each round changing to the closed state (1 second) can be performed twice. In the big hit gaming state, the gaming machine 1 opens the big winning opening after performing eight rounds of changing the big winning opening from open (29 seconds) to closed (3 seconds). It is also possible to execute eight rounds of changing the state from the second state to the closed state (one second).

  In addition, among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, a round having a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) for opening the big winning opening (for example, a round in which the opening state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as a normal opening round A round in which a predetermined time (opening period) for opening the big winning opening is relatively short (for example, a round in which the opening state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term opening round.

  In addition, among the special symbols which are the big hit symbols, the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal opening round (the big hit symbols controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round big hit symbol . Among the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol corresponding to a short opening round (a jackpot symbol controlled to a big hit gaming state in which a short opening round is executed later) may be referred to as a short opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normally open big hit state) controlled after the normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the normal opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). In addition, in the big hit gaming state (short-term opening big-hit state) controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a final special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) Ru. In addition, if the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state compared to the short opening big hit state, the short opening round is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the jackpot state, a normal opening round may be performed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 is a value obtained by the player in each big hit gaming state as a big hit gaming state to be controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, ie, the player It is possible to prepare (implement) various jackpot gaming states in which the degree of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (the number of balls)) is different.

  As an example when not using the short-term opening round, the round which is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state which executes 8 rounds (normal opening round) 8 rounds which is a big hit gaming state which executes round (normal opening round) It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state that executes (normally open round) 16 times. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time of the respective open state (open time), the round (normally open round) In the big hit gaming state to be executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls out of the big hit gaming state to execute round (normally open round) 8 times.

  As an example in the case of using the short-term opening round, the big hit gaming state (mainly 8 round big hit gaming state) which executes the short opening round eight times after executing the normal opening round eight times and the big hit gaming state substantially eight rounds It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player and performs 16 times of the normal opening round. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times the big winning opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round, and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of balls obtained in the short open round If the jackpot is small enough to be ignored, in the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the jackpot gaming state of the real eight rounds.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (the open period) has not passed after opening the special winning opening door, the special winning opening changes from the opening state to the closing state when a predetermined number of winnings to the large winning opening occur. However, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference to the predetermined number. For example, the jackpot gaming state in which eight regular opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of five is performed, and eight normal opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of five. A jackpot gaming state may be prepared in which eight predetermined opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) having the predetermined number of 10, which is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot execution state executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening. For example, the player is more advantageous than the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state in which the number of prize balls is six is executed 16 times and the jackpot state in which the prize balls number is six is performed 16 times; A big hit gaming state may be prepared in which a normal opening round with 12 winning balls is executed 16 times.

  Also, in addition to the value that the player gets from the big hit gaming state itself (the value that the player gets during the big hit gaming state), the kind of state of the gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit gaming state (for example, A period (for example, the number of times of time reduction, the number of times of ST) in which the normal state, the time reduction state, the distinction of the definite change state) or the state of the gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit gaming state By making the length etc. different, the value obtained by the player after the big hit gaming state may be made different.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is normally controlled after becoming a 16R probability variation big hit (described later) as a big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. There are a big hit gaming state in which the opening round is executed 16 times, and a big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round controlled after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit (described later) is executed eight times. However, the big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" is not limited to 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, for example, 2R probability variation big hit etc. It is also good. In the following description, the operation of the gaming machine 1 in the gaming state of 16R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit will be mainly described.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R arranged in the display area of the image display 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is variable during a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be in the predetermined reach state which constitutes a part of the combination of a display.

  With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that is not displayed in a stopped state when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching.

  Further, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be A rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect is an effect mode in which the possibility of the variable display result becoming a big hit is notified in response to the reach state. In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 etc. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  In addition, even when it is a reach state, reach production may not be performed. That is, in the reach state, the stop operation of the decorative symbol is performed without the different rendering operation being performed before the reach state. By not performing the reach effect, the time of the variable display can be shortened and the sense of speed can be improved to improve the interest.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”). As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which one of the plurality of reach effects is performed, that is, depending on which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a high jackpot expectation degree higher than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) + (big hit It is calculated by the probability that the effect is executed other than time) × (probability of not being a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a slip effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like which is realized by a variable display operation such as the decorative symbol. In the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) are made after the decorative symbol is changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, and then a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left") is displayed among the decorative symbol display areas displayed temporarily. By displaying the stop pattern after changing the decorative pattern again in either or both of the decorative symbol display area 5R of 5L and "right", effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of decorative symbols after variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the finalized decorative symbols as variable display results are derived and displayed. There are times when the variable display state of the decorative symbol changes to the reach state by executing the display again, and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-series effect, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being met once, the fixed display that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started Until all the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are decorative symbols (for example, a predetermined pseudo chance sequence etc. is displayed and any one of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is displayed) Or temporarily displayed on all, and then, again, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, re-variable display which is effect display to start variable display of all decorative symbols is predetermined. It can be done once (eg up to 4 times).

  The number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo-sequence effect is the number of variable display (first variable display) until all the decorative patterns in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R first stop temporarily. The number of times (one time) of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative symbols last and the number of times of re-variable display between the first variable display and the last variable display X X is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) smaller by one time than the number of times (X + 2) of adding 0 and 1 or more. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number (temporary stop number) at which all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also referred to as the first pseudo link, and the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is also referred to as the second pseudo link, The third variable display (the second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo run, and the fourth variable display (the third revariable display) to the fourth temporary stop display It is also referred to as the fourth pseudo run. Further, the number of pseudo runs in the pseudo run effect is also referred to as a pseudo run fluctuation number (or a pseudo run number). That is, the number of times of pseudo continuous change, the number of times of re-variable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. The increase in the number of times of the pseudo run will be also referred to as “the pseudo run continues” in the first, second, third,.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", re-variable display (re-variation) is performed 1 to 4 times, and based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, the decorative symbol is variable It can appear as if the display started two to five times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5), re-variable display (re-variation) may be performed three or more times.

  In addition, as for simulated series production, before reaching reach in the particular fluctuation (before reaching reach state), the simulated series chance eye mark temporary stop indication in any part or all of decorative design display area 5L, 5C and 5R As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped temporarily, or after reaching is reached, in any part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped so as to temporarily display the pseudo connected chance eyes. In other words, the effect mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect includes at least the effect mode of displaying the temporary stop before reaching the reach state and the effect mode of displaying the chance symbol temporarily after the reach state. May be In addition, the chance symbol may be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (as well as the pseudo effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the big hit expectation is high. May be Hereinafter, a presentation for giving notice or suggesting to a player that there is a possibility that any reach presentation or a certain reach presentation may be executed, or a high hit probability may be generically referred to as a notice presentation. The advance notice may include a variable display operation different from the slip effect and the pseudo effect, in addition to the slip effect and the pseudo effect, for example, the display of the background image and the display of the message window. Some may use a rendering operation different from the variable display production, such as hold display, audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), and the like.

  It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the contents of the advance notice or the notice suggested by the advance notice effect are realized (actually confirmed). For example, the notice effect that indicates to the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reaching state is at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of the game ball It may be something which is executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or non reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display result by the winning of a certain game ball will be a "big hit" is that at least the finalized decoration symbol by the winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed. Also may be executed (started) before.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading advance notice effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the first pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as the first pending display of the target, and the pending information of the target is supported. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as the second hold display for the target, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the target is also referred to as the variable display for the target. In addition, the preread advance notice effect is executed during the digestion of the pending information of the target (when executed during the digesting process of the pending information of the target including variable display of the target) and before the pending information of the target There are a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information, and a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information of the target and during the digest of the hold information before the hold information of the target.

  After the winning of the game ball (after the establishment of the start condition), the player performs whether or not the content for giving notice of the advance notice effect of the prefetch notice is realized. It is sufficient if it is executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, the rendering operation serving as a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the winning of a certain gaming ball is at least the decorative symbol by the winning of the gaming ball The variable display state may be performed (started) before reaching the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least for the rendering operation of the gaming ball, there is a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" by the winning of a certain game ball. The finalized decorative design by winning may be performed (started) before it is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a pre-reading advance notice effect (pre-judgment notice effect), a hold effect by the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5 HR is prepared It may be For the hold effect, a first hold display to be added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning is generated, and a second hold display to be added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning is generated. The effect of displaying in the notice mode (additional hold effect), or the first hold display or the second hold display that has already been displayed changes to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode. , Etc.) and effects to be performed when the first hold display and the second hold display change to the notice mode, and characters and the like are directly displayed on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 It is an effect to be acted on in an indirect or indirect manner (hold action effect), or an effect to be performed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. In addition, although the display mode of the 1st pending | holding display (or 2nd pending | holding display) which is action object changes when pending | holding effect production is performed, 1st pending | holding display (or The display mode of the second hold display does not change.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  In the present embodiment, as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7”) that become the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” When the special symbol indicating the symbol or the number of "5" is stopped and displayed, it can be "8R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". Moreover, when the special symbol which shows the number of "7" is stopped-displayed, it can be set as "16 R probability variation big hit" which is one mode of "big hit." The round controlled at the time of 8R probability variation big hit is usually an open round. That is, the special symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "5" can be a normally open round jackpot symbol. Moreover, the round controlled when it becomes a 16R probability variation big hit is a normal open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol which shows the number of "7" is a normally open round big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed as described above, the 8R probability variation big hit is described, but the special symbol indicating the number "5" stops When displayed, a short-term opening round may be executed as "2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as" probability "). The special symbol indicating the number "5" in this case is the short-term open round jackpot symbol. In "big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit", and "2R probability variation big hit" are called "big hit type".

  Specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached and the predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, etc., the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is the same decorative symbol with an odd symbol number on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R A row of three pieces (ie, a row of “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “3”) It is the one that is lined with "5," the one that is lined with "7," "7," and "7."

  In the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, variable display of the decorative symbol is started After the reach condition is reached and a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., the finalized decoration symbol to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is one in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged with an even numbered symbol number on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( That is, ones aligned with “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, “8”, and so on).

  In the present embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit is provided, 2R probability variation big hit becomes, the variable display of the decoration design is started, reach condition is reached and predetermined reach effect is After being executed or the like, or without reaching the reach state, the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit may be stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to a 2R probability variation big hit is an odd numbered symbol number on the predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a different decorative symbol (one of at least three) A set of three decorative designs with different patterns (for example, "1", "3", "5", "3", "5", "7", "5", "5", "7" And combinations of decorative symbols including chance symbols etc. (for example, a combination of "1", "probably" and "2". "Probably" is an example of a chance symbol).

  In addition, when the special symbol which shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed in the special figure game, when the fixed decoration symbol which becomes the big hit combination which corresponds to 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, 8R probability variation on the surface There may be a case where the finalized decoration pattern to be the big hit combination corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the 16R probability variation big hit, the normal release round is controlled 16 times (round) to be executed to the normal release big hit state, and after that, time variation control (time shortening control) and probability variation control (probability fluctuation control ) Is done. In addition, based on the 8R probability variation hit, the normal release round is controlled to a normally open jackpot state in which eight rounds are executed, and after that, probability variation control is performed together with time saving control.

  By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" in each of the special drawing games is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability change control is one of the conditions when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the number of probability changes) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result is "big hit". End when it is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probability change control is being performed, the probability change control finish. The predetermined number of times of ST is, for example, 50 times. Further, the normal state is a normal gaming state different from the specified gaming state such as the big hit gaming state. The same control as in the initial setting state of the gaming machine 1 (for example, the state where the initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving control, after the big hit gaming state ends, a predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games are executed and the variable display result becomes a "big hit" when either condition is established first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games have been consumed. Note that the predetermined time reduction number is, for example, 50 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that end, the probability variation control of a predetermined number of ST times (for example, 50 times) Is performed, and time-shortening control is performed a predetermined number of time-shortening times (for example, 50 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) and the ST count (the number of positive variations) are the same (both 50 times), but the big hit (8R positive variation big hit, 16R It is also possible to make the number of time reductions after becoming the probability variation big hit different from the number of times of ST (number of probability variation). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the probability variation number) and the ST number after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations) are the same (both 50 times), but the 8R probability variation The number of STs after the big hit (the number of definite variations) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R certainty variation hit (the number of certain variations). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R certainty variation hit and the time reduction after the 16R certainty variation hit are the same (both 50 times), but the time reduction number after the 8R certainty variation hit And the number of time savings after becoming a 16R probability variation big hit may be made different. In the following description, the jackpot gaming state, the state in which the probability change control is performed, the state in which the time saving control is performed, and the like may be referred to as an advantageous state.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, when 2R probability variation big hit is provided, based on having become 2R probability variation big hit, short-term opening round is carried out twice (round) short-term opening big hit which is executed. The state change control may be performed along with the time-saving control, as in the case of the 16R positive variation hit or the 8R positive variation hit, after being controlled to the state.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game of the predetermined ST number (number of probability variations) is digested. Although the probability change control is ended, the probability change control may not be ended until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (number of probability changes). In such an embodiment, it is preferable to provide a normal jackpot in which the probability change control is not performed after the termination as one mode of the "big hit". For example, when the 8R normal big hit is provided, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state to be executed 8 times (round) based on the 8R normal big hit, and after that end, the probability change control Does not need to be performed (time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability change control is ended when it is determined that the probability change control is to be ended in the probability change fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, even if the probability change control is ended. Good. When such a mode is adopted, the special game with a predetermined number of STs (number of definite variations) is not broken until the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (number of definite variations) is digested without performing the probability variation fall lottery In each game, a random change lottery may be made. The same applies to time saving control.

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the variation time (normal figure variation time) of the regular symbol in the regular figure game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state, or the variation of the regular symbol in each regular figure game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per common view" than in the normal state, and tilt control of movable wing in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per common view" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. The gaming state in which time-saving control or high opening control is performed along with the probability variation control is also referred to as high-probability high-base state. A probability change state in which only the probability change control is performed and time reduction control or high open control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which time saving control and high open control are performed together with probability variation control may be referred to as a "probability state", and in order to be distinguished from high probability low base status, it may also be referred to as a time reduction probability variation state. On the other hand, in order to distinguish from the high probability high base state, the positive variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and short time control or high open control is not performed may be referred to as time short non definite variable state. The short time state in which time saving control or high open control is performed without performing the probability change control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability change control nor the time saving control nor the high open control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be executed frequently, and each special figure game (first special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game is "big hit" is enhanced, which is advantageous for the player. A game state advantageous to a player different from the big hit game state is also referred to as a special game state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for the decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, after displaying temporarily stop display of a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to 8R probability variation big hit in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, it is changed again with the same decorative symbol aligned Alternatively, one of a decorative pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and an ornament pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R positive variation big hit may be displayed as a final decoration symbol as a final decoration display.

  In addition, after the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to 8R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is In a period until it is started, a round number promotion effect may be performed to notify that the big hit is a 16R probability variation big hit. Although the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided in the present embodiment, the same applies to the case where a definite decoration symbol which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided.

  Also, in the present embodiment, although a big hit is not usually provided, after a finalized symbol is derived and displayed which is normally a big hit combination corresponding to a big hit when a big hit is provided, a period until the final round ends ( Alternatively, after the final round, in a period until the next variable display game is started, a probability change promotion effect may be performed informing that the big hit is a probability change big hit.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion direction effect) to be executed during the round is called the jackpot promotion operation (big hit medium round number promotion effect, big hit medium probability change promotion direction), and after the final round is over The promotion effect to be executed (round number promotion effect, definite variation promotion effect) may be referred to as ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating various control boards mounted in the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 are mounted. Further, the gaming machine 1 is also mounted with a relay substrate 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20, etc. It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  A power supply voltage is input to the main substrate 11 from a power supply substrate (not shown). The power supply substrate supplies a power supply voltage of a predetermined voltage by the power supplied to the gaming machine 1. However, for example, at the time of a power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply substrate is lowered. When the power supply voltage output from the power supply substrate drops below a predetermined value, the power supply substrate outputs a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped. A power-off signal is input to the main board 11 from the power board. When the power-off signal is input, the main board 11 executes processing corresponding to the power-off.

  When the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 executes power-supply stop processing (power-off control processing). The power supply stop process stores data indicating the gaming state immediately before the power supply stops (eg, the state of the process flag, the state of the big hit flag state, the state of the probability change flag, the output state of the output port, etc. . By storing the gaming state by the power supply stop processing, the gaming state immediately before the power supply is stopped can be restored.

  First, the CPU 103 generates parity data of data to be stored in the RAM 102. The generated parity data is used for comparison with parity data generated at the time of power failure recovery processing. By comparing the parity data before and after the power failure, it can be confirmed that the power supply stop processing has been correctly performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 turns on the backup flag and stores the backup flag in the RAM 102. The backup flag indicates that the power supply interruption process has been executed, and is used to determine whether or not to recover the gaming state based on the data stored in the RAM 102 at the time of the power failure recovery process.

Next, the CPU 103 sets an access inhibition value in the access register of the RAN 102 to inhibit the access of the RAM 102. Confirm the data to be saved. Data stored in the RAN 102 is backed up by a backup power supply supplied from the power supply substrate.
By the above processing, the CPU 103 ends the power supply stop processing.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for presentation such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electric component for effect such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 or all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8 or all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the lamp 9 It has a function of determining the control content for executing a predetermined rendering operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and is for outputting sound from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the light on / off drive in the lamp 9 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 is similarly connected to the main board 11 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2), a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in correspondence to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “lost”, “16R positive variation big hit” or “8R positive variation big hit”, or the type Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designating command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state in the gaming machine 1. The details of the game state designation command will be described later with reference to FIG. The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of the power failure recovery processing. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for executing a power failure recovery process after the supply of power is resumed from the power failure state of the gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 that has received the power failure recovery designation command executes the power failure recovery processing. The effect control CPU 120 displays a power failure recovery screen for notifying the player that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure, for example, as the power failure recovery processing.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command. The jackpot start designation command is an effect control command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state.
The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command. The special winning opening open notification command is a special winning opening open notification command notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. “XX” of the special winning opening open notification command indicates the number of times the large winning opening is in the open state (round number). The effect control board 12 displays, for example, the number of rounds on the image display device 5 based on the big winning opening open notification command notified from the game control microcomputer.
The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening. The big winning opening after opening notification command is an effect control command to notify that it is a period when the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state.
The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command. The jackpot end designation command is an effect control command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or short open end big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is a first starting opening winning combination designation command. The first starting opening winning combination designation command is an effect control command for notifying a winning on the first starting winning opening. The winning of the first starting winning opening is the first starting opening described in FIG. 2 by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6A described in FIG. It is detected by the switch 22A. When the first start winning combination occurs, the effect control board 12 is notified by the first start opening winning combination designation command that the first start condition for executing the first special view game is satisfied.

  The command B200H is a second starting opening winning combination designation command. The second starting opening winning combination designation command is an effect control command for notifying a winning on the second starting winning opening. The winning of the second starting winning opening is the second starting opening described in FIG. 2 by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B described in FIG. It is detected by the switch 22B. When the second start winning combination occurs, the effect control board 12 is notified by the second start opening winning combination designation command that the second start condition for executing the second special view game is satisfied.

  The command B3XXH is a time saving number designation command. The time saving number specification command is an effect control command for specifying the remaining number of time saving states. The remaining number of time saving states is the number of fluctuation displays in which the time saving state continues until the time saving state ends. “XX” in the time saving number designation command B3XXH indicates the remaining number of time saving states. For example, when the remaining number of time saving state is 30 times, the time saving number designation command is “B31EH”.

The command B4XXH is a definite variation count specification command. The definite variation count specification command is an effect control command that specifies the remaining number of definite variation states. The remaining number of definite change states is the number of fluctuation indications for which the positive change state continues until the definite change state ends. “XX” in the definite variation count designation command B4XXH indicates the remaining number of definite variation states. For example, when the number of remaining definite variation states is 30 times, the fixed variation number specification command is “B41EH”.
In the present embodiment, in order to describe the case where the number of time reductions and the number of definite variations are the same number, “XX” of the time reduction number designation command and “XX” of the probability number variation designation command in the present embodiment have the same value.

The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command. The first reserve storage number notification command is an effect control command for notifying of the first special view retention storage number to display the first special view retention storage number in an identifiable manner in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the like. is there.
The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command. The second reserve storage number notification command is an effect control command for notifying the second special view retention storage number in order to display the special view retention storage number in an identifiable manner in the second start winning storage display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, a command transmitted as pending storage information designates a first start opening winning combination designation command or a second start opening winning combination, which specifies whether the first start winning opening has a start winning or the second start winning opening has a starting winning. While transmitting a command, the 1st pending storage number notification command and the 2nd pending storage number notification command which designate the 1st special figure pending storage number and the 2nd special figure pending storage number are sent. In addition, when the number of pending storages increases, the pending storage number addition specification command (the first pending storage number addition specification command or the second indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has increased). While the pending storage number addition designation command is transmitted, the pending storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has decreased when the pending storage number decreases. A (1 pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Note that, instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying of the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Also, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be sent to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command. The command C6XXH is a variation category command. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The symbol designation command indicates the determination result as to whether the variable display result is “big hit” or not, as the determination result at the time of winning, and the determination result to the big hit type. In addition, the fluctuation category command is a fluctuation category command indicating the judgment result of the fluctuation category (also referred to as “the fluctuation pattern type”) as the judgment result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

FIG. 3C is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command for designating the game state.
The commands 9500H to 9504H are details of the game state designation command described with reference to FIG.
The command 9500H is a normal state designation command. The normal state designation command is an effect control command for designating that the gaming state is the normal state. The normal state in FIG. 3C indicates that it is not a short time state (high base state) or a positive change state (high probability state) described below with the commands 9501H and 9502H.
The command 9501H is a time saving state designating command. The time saving state designating command is an effect control command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base).
The command 9502H is a definite change state specification command. The definite change state specification command is an effect control command that specifies that the gaming state is a positive change (high probability) state (ST state).
The command 9503H is a time saving end designation command. The time saving end designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the time saving state has ended.
In FIG. 3C, as described above, the normal state designating command, the time saving state designating command, the definite variation state designating command, the time shortening end designating command, the probability variation end designating command, the time shortening number of times designation as the effect control command designating the gaming state. Although the command and the probability variation number designation command have been exemplified and described, the effect control command for designating the game state is not limited to these. For example, an effect control command may be transmitted to notify the number of times of effect execution based on the variation pattern described using FIG. 5A or the like. The effect based on the fluctuation pattern is, for example, super reach effect in the ST state.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 16), whether or not the variable display result is determined to be the "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special display display result when the start winning is generated. If the "big hit" is determined, the type of the big hit is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category). ) Is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and changes The variation category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  The effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9). . Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, the light emitting operation of the lamp 9 The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, the blinking operation, and the lighting operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. Among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, an audio control command, and a lamp control command.

  Further, the power failure recovery designation command can be notified together with other effect control commands. For example, when the gaming state designation command is notified together with the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control board 12 can restore the rendering device to the gaming state before the power failure. In addition, when the special winning opening opening notification command is notified along with the blackout recovery specification command, the effect control board 12 changes the effect device to the opening state (for example, the number of rounds) of the special winning opening in the big hit gaming state before the blackout. It can be recovered together. In addition, when the first hold memory number notification command or the first hold memory number notification command is notified in addition to the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control board 12 restores the rendering device according to the number of hold memories before the power failure. Can.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 11. The data etc. which comprise the table of 4 are stored.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for display result determination and the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination is controlled so as to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 5 may be counted.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. In the lost fluctuation pattern, “non-reach fluctuation pattern (“ non-reach lost fluctuation pattern ”“ non-reach fluctuation pattern ”corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”among the cases where the variable display results in (Also referred to as “variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach possibility variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” Also included).

  Further, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". It is also good. As the jackpot fluctuation patterns, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the jackpot types may be prepared.

  For the non-reach fluctuation pattern, prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times, corresponding to the time reduction control to be executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state It is good. Thus, control of shortening the fluctuation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state can be performed by selecting any variation pattern according to the total pending storage number and the gaming state.

  For fluctuation patterns including reach effects such as a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIGS. 5A to 5F (hereinafter, abbreviated as “FIGS. 5A to 5F” or “FIG. 5”) show specific examples of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a first variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a second variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5C is a diagram illustrating a third variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5D illustrates the fourth variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5E is a diagram illustrating a fifth variation category and variation pattern. FIG. 5F is a diagram illustrating a sixth variation category and variation pattern. The variation category and the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 5A to 5F are whether or not the probability variation state (the number of times of execution of the variable display after the big hit end is within the ST number, hereinafter referred to as "ST state") in the start winning processing. One variation category and variation pattern are selected from FIG. Details of the method of selecting the variation category and variation pattern in the start winning process will be described later.

FIG. 5A is a variation category and variation pattern selected when the gaming state is not the ST state, exemplified as a first variation category and variation pattern.
The variation category “PA1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a variation category having non-reach (loss) as its content. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a variation category having normal reach (loss) as its content. The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3". The variation category “PA4” is a variation category that includes Super Reach α (loss). The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The variation category “PA5” is a variation category that includes Super Reach β (loss). The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category "PB3" is a variation category having a normal reach (big hit) as its content. The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3". The variation category “PB4” is a variation category that includes Super Reach α (big hit). The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a variation category that includes Super Reach β (big hit). The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern "PA2-1" belonging to the variation category "PA2" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the slip effect is executed. In addition, since slip production is performed, the special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern "PA2-1". The same applies to other variation patterns in which the slip effect is performed. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to the other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern "PA3-1" belonging to the variation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The same applies to the other fluctuation patterns in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (rendering) is executed as the gasse. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the variation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed twice.

  In the present embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but if 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for 2R probability variation big hit (probability) May be provided. The fluctuation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC1”. The variation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (probable) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (probable) variation pattern in which the slip effect is performed. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probable) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PC2”. The variation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (probability) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (probable) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PC3”. The variation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (probable) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  FIG. 5B illustrates a second variation category and variation pattern, wherein the variation category and variation selected when the gaming state is the ST state and the variation count of the variable display is more than a predetermined number and is not reach timing It is a pattern. Here, the reach timing refers to the timing at which the reach effect is performed in the ST state. Details of the reach timing will be described later with reference to FIG.

The variation category “PA1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The variation pattern "PA1-1" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern "PA2-1". The variation category “PB1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (big hit).
As the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "PA1-1", for example, when deciding the symbol of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described in FIG. It may be stopped to shorten the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the determination of the decorative symbol. Further, the time during variable display of the decorative symbol may be shortened to shorten the time until the decorative symbol is determined.

  In FIG. 5B, the variation patterns “PA2-2” to “PA2-3”, the variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, and the variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” described in FIG. 5A. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4”, fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”, fluctuation patterns “PB4-2” to “PB4-4”, and a fluctuation pattern “PB5” “1” to “PB5-4” are not selected, that is, when the gaming state is the ST state and the number of times of change of the variable display is more than a predetermined number and it is not the reach timing, The reach effect, the super reach effect, and the pseudo connected effect will not be executed. Therefore, in the case of a loss in the ST state which is not reach timing, the effect mode such as the reach effect is not executed for a long time, and the time of the variable display is shortened, so that the interest can be improved.

  In FIG. 5B, the variation pattern selected at the time of the big hit illustrated the case where PB4-1 which is the variation pattern for executing the super reach α is selected, but the variation pattern selected at the time of the big hit Is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern may be selected in which the super reach β is performed. In addition, a variation pattern may be selected in which the pseudo-series effect is executed at the time of a big hit.

  FIG. 5C illustrates the third variation category and variation pattern, wherein the variation is selected when the gaming state is the ST state, the variation count of the variable display is more than a predetermined number, and the reach timing is the super reach Category and fluctuation pattern.

  The variation category “PA4” is a variation category that includes Super Reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA4". The variation category “PB4” is a variation category that includes Super Reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB4”.

  In FIG. 5C, the variation pattern “PA1-1”, the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, the variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, and the variation pattern “PA4” described in FIG. 5A. -2 "to" PA4-4 ", variation patterns" PA5-1 "to" PA5-4 ", variation patterns" PB3-1 "to" PB3-2 ", variation patterns" PB4-2 "to" PB4-4 " And the fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” are not selected, that is, the gaming state is the ST state, the number of times of fluctuation of the variable display is more than a predetermined number, and the super reach timing When this is the case, the effect of the super reach α is executed even in the case of a loss or in the case of a big hit.

  The reach timing at which the reach effect is executed can be determined in advance among the number of STs, as described later with reference to FIG. The reach timing can be defined as normal reach and super reach timing. Therefore, the upper limit number of super reach performed in the ST state is limited, and when the upper limit number of super reach is performed, a big hit can always be made. For example, when the super reach timing is set three times, since it is not the reach timing in the fourth super reach, as shown in FIG. 3B, it can always be a big hit. By limiting the upper limit number of times of super reach, it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern selected at the time of big hit illustrated in FIG. 5C the case where PA4-1 or PB4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern for performing super reach alpha was selected, the fluctuation pattern selected Is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern may be selected in which the super reach β is performed. In addition, a variation pattern may be selected in which the pseudo-series effect is executed at the time of a big hit.

  FIG. 5D illustrates a fourth variation category and variation pattern, wherein the variation category is selected when the gaming state is ST, the variation count of the variable display is more than a predetermined number, and the reach timing is normal reach. And fluctuation patterns.

  The variation category “PA3” is a variation category having normal reach (loss) as its content. The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA3". The variation category "PB3" is a variation category having a normal reach (big hit) as its content. The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB3”.

  In FIG. 5D, the variation pattern “PA1-1”, the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, the variation pattern “PA3-2”, and the variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4” described in FIG. 5A. -4 ", fluctuation patterns" PA5-1 "to" PA5-4 ", fluctuation pattern" PB3-2 ", fluctuation patterns" PB4-1 "to" PB4-4 ", and fluctuation patterns" PB5-1 "to" "PB5-4" is not selected, that is, when the gaming state is the ST state and the number of times of change of the variable display is more than a predetermined number and the normal reach timing, even in the case of losing, a big hit Even in this case, the normal reach effect will be executed.

  The normal reach timing at which the normal reach effect is executed can be predetermined in the ST number as in the super reach timing. Therefore, by performing the normal reach and the super reach in the ST state, it is possible to increase the effect aspect and to improve the interest.

  Although the variation pattern selected at the time of the big hit illustrated in FIG. 5D illustrates a case where PB3-1, which is a variation pattern for executing normal reach, is selected, the selected variation pattern is not limited thereto. For example, the variation pattern PB3-2 accompanied by the pseudo connected effect may be selected.

  FIG. 5E is a variation category and variation pattern which is selected when the gaming state is the ST state and the variation count of the variable display is within a predetermined number, which is exemplified as the fifth variation category and variation pattern. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the reach timing is not set within the predetermined number of fluctuations.

  The variation category “PA1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The variation pattern "PA1-1" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern "PA2-1". The variation category “PB1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB1”. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern “PB2-1”.

  As the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation patterns "PA1-1" and "PB1-1", for example, when the symbol of the variable display of the decorative symbol is decided, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described in FIG. The decorative pattern may be stopped at one time (stop without reaching reach) to shorten the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the determination of the decorative pattern. Further, the time during variable display of the decorative symbol may be shortened to shorten the time until the decorative symbol is determined. In the present embodiment, in a manner corresponding to PA 1-1 and PB 1-1, a decoration pattern is stopped at one time, and a case of performing a rendering mode that does not reach a reach state is illustrated and described later. In addition, you may call the production | presentation aspect made to stop a decoration pattern in a reach state "immediate hit" in the case of a big hit, and "immediate loss" in the case of loss.

In FIG. 5E, the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, the variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, and the variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” described in FIG. 5A. , Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4”, variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”, variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4”, and variation patterns “PB5” “1” to “PB5-4” are not selected, that is, when the gaming state is the ST state and the number of times of variation of the variable display is within the predetermined number, even in the case of a miss, a big hit Even if, shortening and non-reach production will be executed.
Perform the effects of shortening and non-reach to shorten the time until the decoration pattern is fixed until the variation of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of variations after entering the ST state, to provide a sense of speed And can improve the interest.
In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of scenarios for executing the specific effect until the fluctuation of the variable display reaches a predetermined fluctuation number. When the number of times of change of the variable display is within the predetermined number, it is not necessary to set the reach timing described using FIG. 7. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the effect mode (scenario) relating to the reach effect, as compared to the case where the reach timing is set to all the number of changes in the ST state.

  In addition, although FIG. 5E demonstrated the case where shortening ・ non-reach production | presentation was performed, a production | presentation aspect is not limited to this. For example, as long as the effect ends within the special figure fluctuation time, only one of the shortening effect and the non-reach effect may be performed.

  FIG. 5F illustrates a sixth variation category and variation pattern, wherein the variation category and variation selected when the gaming state is the ST state and the variation count of the variable display is more than a predetermined number and is not reach timing It is a pattern. The sixth variation category and variation pattern shown in FIG. 5F are alternatives to the second variation category and variation pattern described in FIG. 5B. That is, when the gaming state is the ST state and the number of times of change of the variable display is more than the predetermined number and it is not the reach timing, either the second change category and the change pattern or the sixth change category or the change pattern One will be used.

  The variation category “PA1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The variation pattern "PA1-1" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern "PA2-1". The variation category “PB1” is a variation category that includes shortening / non-reach (big hit).

In FIG. 5F, a variation pattern “PA4-1” is added to the variation pattern described in FIG. 5B. That is, when the gaming state is the ST state and the number of times of change of the variable display is more than the predetermined number and it is not the reach timing, in the case of a loss, the sixth change category and the change pattern are the second change category. It is assumed that a variation pattern corresponding to super reach α not selected by the variation pattern may be selected.
In the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach α (loss) is selected by the sixth variation category and the variation pattern shown in FIG. The effect control to execute and prevent the effect of super reach will be described later. By avoiding the execution of the reach effect when it is not the reach timing, it is possible to execute the effect aspect of managing and reporting the upper limit of the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, although the case where PB4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern for performing super reach alpha was selected was illustrated in Drawing 5F, a fluctuation pattern selected is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern may be selected in which the super reach β is performed. In addition, a variation pattern may be selected in which the pseudo-series effect is executed at the time of a big hit.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a determined special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special view game (the special view game using the first special view) by the first special symbol display device 4A. It is a table to be referred to before deciding whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special view display result. The type of jackpot is, for example, 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, etc. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the determined special symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special view game (the special view game using the second special view) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to determine based on the random number value MR1 for determination of the special display result determination whether to control to the big hit gaming state as "big hit (16 R probability variation big hit, 8 R probability variation big hit)". It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special image display result determination according to the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is "big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit)" And it is assigned to the special drawing display result of "loss". Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numeric value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special display result according to whether it is in the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state Value) is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "loss".

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability high base state, more determination values are allocated to the "big hit" special view display result than when the gaming state is the low probability low base state ing. Specifically, in the low probability low base state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (values in the range of "8000" to "8189") are assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" There is. On the other hand, in the high-probability high-base state, the determination values "8000" to "8818" of more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) are allocated to the "big hit" special view display result. With such a setting, the special view display result is considered as a "big hit" in the definite change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the gaming machine 1 as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). The probability of being determined to control to the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  In the first special drawing display result determination table for the first special drawing, different display result determination tables are used for the first special drawing and the second special drawing. The determination value is assigned, and in the second special view display result determination table for the second special view, the special view display result of the “small hit” that the determination value of the predetermined range smaller than the first special view display result determination table is May be assigned to This makes it possible to avoid frequent occurrences of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the configuration of the big hit type determination table will be described using FIG.
FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state Is a table to be referenced.
In the big hit classification determination table 131 illustrated in the present embodiment, the case where the first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special The case where it is used in common with the case where the second special drawing game (special drawing game using the second special drawing) by the symbol display device 4B is executed is illustrated. However, the big hit classification determination table assigns a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for big hit classification determination for each of the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, and determines the big hit classification You may do so.
Also, the big hit classification determination table 131 illustrated in FIG. 7 does not divide the 16R positive variation big hit and the 8R positive variation big hit as a big hit type, but is commonly used in the first special view game and the second special view game As will be described later, the 16R probability variation big hit and the 8R probability variation big hit may be separately set as the big hit type.

In FIG. 7, the jackpot type determination table 131 has field items of "jackpot type", "reach timing", and "determination value".
There are 10 types of jackpot types, from jackpot 1 to jackpot 10. The reach timing is preset for each type of jackpot. The jackpot type is determined according to the jackpot, and the reach timing is determined according to the determined jackpot type.
The reach timing is a timing at which the specific effect is always executed when the number of times of change of the variable display becomes a value (n-th time) shown in FIG. 7 in the ST state after the big hit end. In the present embodiment, reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect. Further, in FIG. 7, reach timing is illustrated as the timing at which the specific effect is performed. The reach timing is the timing at which the reach effect is performed. FIG. 7 sets, as the reach timing, the number of times of fluctuation of the variable display after reaching the ST state in which the reach effect is performed.
In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol illustrated as being derived and displayed as a specific display result is a big hit, when controlled by the DPU 103 as a positive change state illustrated as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In the reach timing according to the jackpot type illustrated as the timing according to the advantageous state, the case where the super reach illustrated as a specific effect is performed is shown. That is, since the timing at which the reach timing is executed varies depending on the type of the big hit, the timing at which the super reach is executed is not fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest due to the fixed timing of the super reach execution.
The reach timing is set, for example, in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reach effect is exemplified as the type of the specific effect executed at the timing according to the big hit, but the type of the specific effect executed at the timing according to the big hit is limited to the reach effect The specific effect may be any effect that is performed while the variable display is fluctuating in the special state (for example, the ST state). For example, other types of effects such as pseudo continuous effect may be performed. Moreover, although the implementation timing of super reach was determined in the reach timing, the timing of other specific effects may be determined. For example, the execution timing of each of the reach effect and the pseudo-sequence effect may be determined.
For reach effects where the reach timing is set in FIG. 7, the normal reach effect corresponding to the normal reach of the fluctuation category PA3 (loss) or PB3 (big hit), the fluctuation category PA4 (loss), PA5 (loss), PB4 (loss) And a super reach effect corresponding to the super reach of the jackpot) or PB5 (jackpot). The * mark illustrated in FIG. 7 indicates the number of changes at which normal reach production is performed, and the no mark indicates the number of changes at which super reach production is performed. The reach timing can be set up to three times of reach timings 1 to 3 for each jackpot type.
In the present embodiment, normal reach effect is illustrated as the first specific effect, and super reach effect is illustrated as the second specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the first specific effect. The reach timing set in FIG. 7 includes the timing for performing normal reach and the timing for performing super reach, and the CPU 103 executes normal reach or super reach according to the setting of reach timing. This makes it possible to limit unintended specific effects.

For example, in FIG. 7, when the jackpot type is the jackpot 1, the reach timing 1 is set as the reach timing. The reach timing 1 is the 30th change in the ST state after the end of the big hit, and the reach effect to be performed is the super reach. That is, when the big hit type is the big hit 1, among the 50 times of ST times in this embodiment, only the 30th super reach in the reach timing 1 is set, and the reach timings 2 to 3 are not set. .
Further, when the big hit type is the big hit 10, three reach timings 1 to 3 are set as the reach timing. The reach timing 1 is the 14th super reach where the number of changes in the ST state after the big hit ends. The reach timing 2 is the super reach where the number of changes in the ST state after the big hit is the 20th. Furthermore, reach timing 3 is the 39th super reach where the number of changes in the ST state after the big hit ends.

  The determination value is a determination value (determination range) of the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type for each jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the determined value of the random value MR2 is generated between 0 and 99. For example, the jackpot type of jackpot 1 is determined when the random value MR2 is generated with a determined value of 0-9. Note that the generation range of the random value MR2 and the determination range for each jackpot type are arbitrary.

As described above, at the set reach timing, the reach effect is performed at the set number of changes whether it is a loss or a big hit. In addition, in the start winning process to be described later, execution of reach effect in the case of losing is prohibited in the number of times of fluctuation of the variable display that is not the reach timing.
When the reach timing is not reached in the ST state, the generation of the super reach effect can be intentionally determined by limiting the execution of the super reach effect.
In addition, since the reach timing is set up to three times at the reach timings 1 to 3, the reach effect of the loss is not performed four times in the ST state, and it always becomes a big hit in the fourth reach effect. That is, it is possible to provide four ceiling times for the reach effect. When the ceiling is provided for the reach effect, by recognizing the number of times the reach effect has been executed in the ST state, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the big hit and improve the interest.

The number of changes set at the reach timing is arbitrary among the number of times ST. In the present embodiment, the case where the number of times of ST is 50 is illustrated, so that the number of times of change set as the reach timing can be set in the first to fifty times. However, when the reach timing is set to end with the early change number, the reach effect may not be performed with the remaining change number up to the ST number, and the interest may decrease. On the other hand, when the reach timing is set to start from the late number of changes, the player is given the impression that the ceiling of the reach effect can not be reached with the remaining number of times up to the ST number, and the interest also decreases. There is a case.
In addition, when the reach timing is set twice or more, if the reach timing interval is short, the period in which the reach effect is not performed may be extended and the interest may be reduced.

In the setting of the reach timing shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing is set in view of the above viewpoint.
First, in the present embodiment, the reach timing interval is set so as not to be short. That is, the interval between the reach timing 1 and the reach timing 2 and the interval between the reach timing 2 and the reach timing 3 are set at predetermined intervals without being continuous. By not shortening the reach timing interval, for example, by not making the reach timing continuous, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest due to the continuous reach effect of losing.
In addition, in the case of big hit type 1 or big hit 2 in which only the reach timing 1 is set, the reach timing is set to the 30th and 40th times slightly later than the 25th half of the 50 times of the ST number of 50 times. In addition, the first variation number (15th-25th) set at reach timing 1 of the big hit type where the reach timing is set twice with the big hit 3-5 of the big hit is the big hit type where the reach timing is set once It is set earlier than the first fluctuation number (30th to 40th) set in the jackpot 1-2. Similarly, the first variation number (11th to 14th) in which the big hit type where the reach timing is set 3 times is set at the reach timing 1 of the big hit 6 to 10 is the big hit type where the reach timing is set 2 times Is set earlier than the first variation number (15th to 25th) set in the jackpot 3-5. Therefore, reach presentation is executed at an appropriate reach timing among the number of times of ST, and it is possible to improve interest.
That is, the jackpot type includes a first jackpot type for executing the super reach effect the first number of times and a second jackpot type for executing the super reach effect the second number of times greater than the first number, and the second number of The super reach effect performed first in the inside is earlier than the super reach effect performed first in the first number. Therefore, even if it is a jackpot type in which the number of times the super reach effect is performed is small, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the end of the execution of the super reach effect.

  Moreover, in the setting of the reach timing shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing 1 is not set in the 1st to 10th fluctuation numbers. This is to implement an effect based on the variation pattern PA1 or PB1 in which the special pattern variation time described in FIG. 5E is shortened in the first to tenth variation times. When the number of changes is the first to the tenth, since the reach effect is not performed and the special figure change time is shortened, variable display with a sense of speed can be performed, and the interest can be improved.

The big hit classification determination table 131 described above does not distinguish between the 16R probability variation big hit and the 8R probability variation big hit as the big hit classification, and also illustrates the case of common use in the first special view game and the second special view game. However, the big hit type determination table 131 may be set as the big hit type so as to distinguish the 16R probability variation big hit and the 8R probability variation big hit. For example, when the generation range of the random number is 0 to 199, the reach timing in 10 types of big hit may be set with 0 to 99 as a 16R probability variation big hit and 100 to 199 as an 8R probability variation big hit. Also, the big hit type determination table may be set separately for the first special figure game and the second special figure game.
Moreover, although the case where there were 10 types from big hit 1 to big hit 10 was demonstrated as a big hit type, a big hit type is not limited to 10 types. For example, 100 types may be prepared as a jackpot type.
Moreover, although the case where reach | attainment timing was a value previously determined according to each big hit classification was demonstrated, reach | attainment timing can also be made variable. For example, the reach timing may be set to be different depending on the operation of the push button 31B or the like by the player.
In addition, the reach effect performed at the reach timing has been described as including both the super reach effect and the normal reach effect described in FIG. 5A and the like. However, reach production may not include both super reach production and normal reach production. For example, the reach timing of only the super reach effect may be determined. Further, the reach timing may be determined only for the normal reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but in the case of providing 2R probability variation big hit (probability), the case of the second special figure game is more than the case of the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to 2R probability variation big hits (probability). With such a setting, the second special figure game is less likely to be a 2R probability variation hit (probability) than the first special figure, so the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the 2R probability variation big hit (studging) which is difficult to obtain the winning balls, and to prevent the decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that are different from each other in the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, each of the variation categories is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determination of the variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and the number of the determination values, etc.) assigned to at least one variation category among the plurality of variation categories are mutually different There is. Note that one large change category determination table including information of all the change category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of change category determination tables.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of the plurality of variation patterns. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the above-described decision values (for example, the range and the number of decision values, etc.) allocated to at least one fluctuation pattern among a plurality of fluctuation patterns are mutually different There is. Note that, instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 including information of each variation pattern determination table.
The description of the configuration of the big hit type determination table using FIG. 7 is ended above.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is supplied with backup power generated on the power supply substrate, and part or all of the storage content of the RAM 102 is backed up. That is, even when the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply substrate is stopped, the capacitor or battery as a backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible. Up), the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is saved. In particular, data indicating at least the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data required to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like occurs (eg Process flag etc. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 and the like. . The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the first start winning occurs but has not yet started The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the CPU 103 random number based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserve data (first special view reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game that is not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserve data (second special view reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  In addition, the hold data of the first special view game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special view hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special view game of the second special symbol display device 4B The holding data (second special-image holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common holding storage unit in association with the holding number.

  The common drawing reserve storage unit 151C is a reserved data related to the common drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the gaming ball that has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 Store information). For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 for the memory is stored as reserved data (general drawing reserve information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. As a specific example, in the game control flag setting unit 152, a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is the high certainty state (ST state), and a time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state) Data indicating the value of the flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like are stored for each of.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, and the second special view hold storage number The second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, etc. It is memorized. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a fluctuation count value, which is a storage value of a fluctuation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (the number of probability variations) and the number of time reductions.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control substrate 13 are transmitted to the effect control substrate 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, or the game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is counted by the random number circuit 124 or the like in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the rendering operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is one of a plurality of types in the ROM 121 as a table for executing the hold effect when the first hold display is added. A first pending display mode determination table may be stored which is referred to in order to make a decision. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first suspension display mode determination tables which are different from each other in the type of display mode which can be determined in the first suspension display mode determination table and the determination ratio of each mode. . In each first hold display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the first hold display is a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for display mode determination of the first hold display at the time of addition. ) May be assigned. Note that, instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 displays the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect when the first hold display is added. A second pending display mode determination table may be stored which is referred to in order to make a decision.

  In addition, whether the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display in the ROM 121 In order to determine whether to change to the first display change presence / absence determination table to be referred to in order to determine whether to change to any of a plurality of types of display when it is determined to change to another display mode The first pending change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, in the ROM 121, there are changes to other display modes, and there are a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination rates for no change to other display modes, or the first hold change mode determination A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored that are different from each other in the type of display mode that can be determined in the table and the determination ratio of each mode. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determination of presence or absence of change may be assigned to each of the first pending change presence / absence determination tables with change and no change. In each of the first suspension change mode determination tables, each of the display modes of the first suspension display is a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first suspension display after change. ) May be assigned. Note that, instead of the plurality of first pending change presence / absence determination tables, one large first pending change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first pending change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Also, instead of the plurality of first pending change mode determination tables, one large first pending change mode decision table including information of all the first pending change mode decision tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR is changed to another display mode as a table regarding execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display in the ROM 121 In order to determine whether to change to the second display change presence / absence determination table referenced to determine whether or not to change to any of a plurality of types of display when it is determined to change to another display mode A second pending change mode determination table referenced in may be stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table which is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (a timing such as how many subsequent changes are to be performed). It may be done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first pending change presentation execution timing determination tables which are different from one another in terms of the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first pending change presentation execution timing determination table and the respective determination ratios. It may be In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Also, in place of the plurality of first hold change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change presentation execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change presentation execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121 It is also good. Similarly, in the ROM 121, a second hold change effect execution timing determination table is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (a timing such as how many subsequent changes are performed). It may be stored.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence decision table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change presentation execution timing determination table. May be stored.

  In addition, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode in the ROM 121, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table relating to the hold action effect to act on or indirectly, the action effect execution presence / absence decision table referred to in order to decide whether or not to execute the hold action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of effect presentation execution presence / absence determination tables which are different in the determination ratio of execution and non-execution. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of execution may be assigned to each of the action effect execution presence / absence determination tables for each of the action effect execution presence / absence determination tables. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the hold action effect, when it is determined to execute the hold effect effect, the hold action effect effect referred to in order to determine which effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables may be stored that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold effect effect that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the determination ratio of each. . A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold action effect may be assigned to each of the effect modes in the respective hold action effect effect mode determination tables.

  In addition, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is not changed to another display mode in the ROM 121, a character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table relating to the hold action cast effect that causes or indirectly to act, a action cast effect execution execution determination table referenced to determine whether or not to execute the hold action cast effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action cassette effect execution presence / absence determination tables which are different from each other in the determination ratio of execution and non-execution. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determination of presence / absence of execution may be assigned to each action presence / absence determination table for determination of presence / absence of execution of action. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the hold action cassette effect, when it is determined to execute the hold action cassette effect, the hold action referred to in order to determine which effect mode among the plurality of effect modes It is also possible to store in the ROM 121 the gasse effect presentation mode determination table. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action cassette effect stage determination tables which are different from each other in type of presentation mode of the hold action cassette effect which can be determined in the hold action cassette effect stage effect determination table and the determination ratio of each of them. May be Even if a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the effect of holding action is assigned to each of the effect modes in each of the effect mode of effecting effect presentation mode determination table Good.

  When executing an active display change effect (described later) for changing a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect as a table regarding the active display change effect. For this purpose, an active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination tables which are different from one another in the determination ratio of execution and non-execution. In each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the active display change presentation, when it is determined to execute the active display change presentation, the active display referred to in order to determine which presentation mode among the plurality of presentation modes. The change presentation effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of active display change presentation effect mode determination tables which are different from each other in type of production mode of active display change presentation that can be determined in the active display change presentation effect mode determination table and the determination ratio of each. May be Even if a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect is assigned to each of the effect modes in the respective active display change effect effect mode determination tables. Good.

  The active display change effect is an effect of changing the special image into the advance notice mode. In other words, an active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, and information according to the active display (for example, the active display or the periphery of the active display or characters and images displayed around the active display frame) are displayed as notices. It is an effect to change. In addition, there may be a case where an active display change cassette effect, which is an effect mode common to at least a part of the active display change effect, may be executed. In addition, as main notice effects such as step-up notice effects, active display change effects or active display change cassette effects may be executed.

  In addition, the ROM 121 is configured with a plurality of effect control patterns used to control the effect operation by the effect control CPU 120 using various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data etc. are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern, a notice effect (including a pre-reading notice effect), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration in a period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special view game until the finalized special symbol as the special view display result is derived and displayed, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. Representing operations in the variable display operation of the symbol, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various rendering operations not accompanied with the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, hold for display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various production operation | movements, such as a production | presentation, the holding production | presentation with respect to the display mode of the pending | holding display in 2nd start prize memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, It is sufficient if the contents of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. are set in series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 120 A determination value corresponding to an execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main substrate 11, or that a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set according to the predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, light off operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and specified by operation detection control data. Control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the operation effective period, which is a period in which the operation is effective, is performed to determine the contents of the effect. Note that dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a component for effect that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or pattern data of the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Advance the control of the movable member etc. provided in the effect model. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and an effect for designating execution of the effect control Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  An instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 13 receiving the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, a data holding area 190 for effect control as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. As a specific example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, data indicating the value of the probability variation flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. In addition, the effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating the effect number count value, which is a storage value of the effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time saving and the number of probability variation.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages are provided. . When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as one set of four commands. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that among the commands, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the first start winning reception command buffer 194A in the order received at the first start winning. At the time of the first starting winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a first starting opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the first special view game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening winning a prize specified command One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponds to the first start opening winning combination designating command) The command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “3” becomes buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages. . When there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (second starting opening winning designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (second pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as one set of four commands. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured such that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other among these commands.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B in the order received at the second start winning. At the second start winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a second start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command , Change category command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the second special view game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening winning a prize designation command One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponds to the second start opening prize designation command) The command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to buffer number "1".

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first preread notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A are provided in the first read advance notice buffer 194C. That is, in the first read advance notice buffer 194C, the contents of the determination regarding the read advance notice effect related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. The contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted in the first read advance notice buffer 194C. In addition, in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the first read advance notice buffer 194C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second preread notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B are provided in the second preread notice buffer 194D. That is, in the second preread notice buffer 194D, the contents of the determination regarding the preread notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second read advance notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

First, the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started will be described using FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the gaming control microcomputer 100.
In FIG. 11, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the microcomputer 100 for gaming control (specifically, The CPU 103) executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, and then starts the main process after step S001. In the main processing, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S002), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set to an accessible state (step S005). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch input via the input port of the I / O 105 is in the on state (step S006). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is in the on state (step S007; YES), the CPU 103 executes the normal initialization process (steps S010 to S014).

On the other hand, when the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is not in the on state (step S 007; NO), it determines whether the power supply stop processing has been performed (step S 008). In the power supply stop process, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100, etc. Is a data protection process that temporarily backs up the data of Data backup is performed, for example, by storing data to be protected in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power supply. Data backup may be performed by saving data in the backup RAM area when it is detected that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed can be determined, for example, by whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined, for example, by the presence or absence of a backup flag set when backing up data. Also, it can be determined depending on whether parity data is added to the backup RAM area.
When it is determined that the power supply stop processing has not been performed (step S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes the initialization processing starting from step S010.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the power supply stop processing has been performed (step S 008; YES), the CPU 103 performs parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area, and the check result is OK It is determined (step S009). In the process of step S 009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 at the time of power supply stoppage is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up by the power supply stoppage process, The check result is judged by the agreement between the two. If the power supply stop processing is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the start of the power supply. On the other hand, if the power supply stop processing is not performed correctly, the two checksums do not match. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply stop. In such a case, the gaming state or the like of the gaming machine 1 can not be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped. If the parity check result is not OK (step S 009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing executed at the time of power on, which is not recovery by the power supply stop processing (step S 1010 to step S 014).

On the other hand, when the parity check result is OK (step S009; YES), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (the process of steps S41 to S44) for returning the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of power supply suspension. Do.
In step S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S41). Step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of steps S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is for the portion of the work area that is not initialized. The parts that are not initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state at the time of power supply stop (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.), area where output state of output port is saved (output port buffer) It is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

After executing the processing of step S42, the CPU 103 sets the top address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43), and sequentially transfers the contents of the backup command transmission table into the work area (RAM 102). Area) to enable transmission of the command stored in the backup command transmission table.
After execution of the process of step S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). The CPU 103 may transmit the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with the power failure recovery designation command. As commands to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command, for example, the variable display result command (8CXXH) described in FIG. 3, the symbol determination command (8F00), the gaming state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), large The winning opening opening notification (A1XX), the special winning opening after opening notification (A2XX), the time reduction number designation command (B3XX), the probability variation number specification command (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it is possible to restore the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped.
After executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S015.

In the process of step S008, when it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed (step S008; NO), or when it is determined in the process of step S009 that the check result of the parity check is not OK (step S009; (NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010.
In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear process. The data to be initialized is, for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol. The data is initialized by setting the value of the data to 0. However, for example, a predetermined initial value may be set as the data. Further, initialization is performed on the entire storage area of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. As an area which is not initialized, for example, it is good also as an area where data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for judging per symbol normally is stored.

After executing the processing of step S010, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S011), and sequentially initializes the contents of the initialization setting table to the initial values of the work area (Step S012).
By the processing of steps S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of a game in gaming machine 1 and the like set in game control flag setting unit 152 Ru. In addition, initial values are set to various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. In addition, an initial value is set to a counter that is set to the game control counter setting unit 154 and used to control a count value used to control the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, initial values are set to various buffers which are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used to control the progression of the game in the gaming machine 1.

After executing the process of step S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the command transmission table for initialization to the pointer (step S013), and sequentially sets the contents of the command transmission table for initialization to the work area (area in the RAM 102). Enable transmission of the command stored in the initialization command transmission table.
After executing the processing of step S013, the CPU 103 issues an initialization designation command (microcomputer for game control) for initializing a sub-substrate (substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 11 is mounted) such as the effect control substrate 12 or the like. 100) transmits a command indicating that the initialization processing has been performed to the sub substrate (step S014). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization designation command, the image display device 5 performs an initial screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

  After executing the process of step S014 or after performing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S015). The CPU 103 performs, for example, processing in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update a random value in a predetermined range of random number values.

  Further, in step S015, the CPU 103 sets the register of the game control timer so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms. The gaming control microcomputer 100 incorporates a CTC (counter / timer circuit). The game control timer can use CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process (step S018) and the display random number update process (step S019) in the main process. When executing the initial value random number updating process and the display random number updating process, the interruption inhibiting process is executed (step S017), and the interruption process by the gaming control timer is set to be inhibited. Further, when the display random number updating process and the initial value random number updating process are finished, the interrupt permission process is executed (step S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released.
In this embodiment, the display random number to be updated in step S019 is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and whether it is a reach when it is not a big hit. Is a random number to In the display random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated.
In addition, the initial value random number for which update processing is executed in step S018 is the count of a counter (normal pattern determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to determine the initial value of the value. In the initial value random number updating process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
This is the end of the description of the main processing using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the game control timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt process.
When the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by performing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the gaming machine 1 is output (step S13 ).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table can be enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.
This is the end of the description of the game control timer interrupt process using FIG.

  FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process of step S15, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). First, the start winning determination process of step S101 will be described using FIGS. 14 to 19F.

  FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning process executed in step S208 and step S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 16A is a flow chart showing an example of the winning random number value determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 22A is in the on state (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is in the on state (step S201; YES), the first special view reserve storage number (the first special view game reserve number) is a predetermined upper limit (for example, upper limit storage number) It is determined whether it is "4" as (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by, for example, reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value stored in the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. For example, when the first special figure storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1", for example ( Step S207).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the number of first special image storage blocks has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES) After executing the process of step S209, based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting opening switch It is determined whether 22B is in the on state (step S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state (step S203; YES), the second special view reserve storage number (the reserve number for the second special view game) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, upper limit storage number) It is determined whether or not "4" as in (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special image storage number by reading the second storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special drawing reserve storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S210).

  After the process of step S207 is executed, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), and the stored value of the start hole buffer is "0" (initialized) (step S209), and the process of step S203. Go to After the process of step S210 is executed, the start winning process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S211), and the stored value of the start hole buffer is "0" (initialized) (step S212). Finish. As a result, even if the start winning combination of the game balls is simultaneously detected in the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 updates the special view storage number according to the start opening buffer value which is the storage value of the start opening buffer so as to add 1 (step S215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, and the big hit type among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 for random number and the random number value MR3 for variable category determination are extracted (step S217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the top of the empty entry in the special-image hold storage unit 151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as hold information (step S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special image storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in second special image storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, transmission setting of a starting opening winning combination designation command corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning combination designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning combination designation command is performed. For example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command signal processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number value determination process is executed (step S220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 The setting for setting is performed (step S221). For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the winning random number value determination process of step S220 will be described.
The CPU 103 checks the current gaming state in the gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of the short time flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like as the winning random number value determination process (step S220). It identifies (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is in the on state by confirming the status of the probability variation flag or the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and the probability variation flag is in the off state. When the time saving flag is in the on state, it is specified that the time saving state is established. That is, for example, the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is on, depending on whether the respective flags of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are on or off. In the state, the game state is identified as the high probability high base state, and when the probability change flag is on and the time saving flag is off, the game state is identified as high probability low base state If the probability change flag is off and the short time flag is on, the low probability high base state is identified, and if both the probability change flag and the time short flag are off, the low probability low base state (normal State). That is, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current gaming state is from by the respective states of the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  Subsequently to the process of step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special view display result determination table and second special view display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the start opening buffer value is "1". In some cases, the first special view display result determination table may be used, and when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second special view display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special view display result of "big hit" in the special view display result determination table data set by the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets random number value MR1 and so on. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be the "big hit" by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range (big hit start determination) can do.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (big hit) (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special view (the “first special view” corresponding to “1” or the “second special view” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start opening buffer value. From the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, the table data for big hit type determination is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. In the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit, the high probability state (ST state) is always set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing is determined for each of the determined jackpot types. The reach timing based on the selected type of big hit is set in the game control counter setting unit 154 in the process of setting the reach timing of step S320 in the big hit end process (step S117) described later with reference to FIG. Therefore, in the process of step S409, the CPU 103 makes the determined big hit type readable in the big hit end process (step S117) and stores it in the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155. Do.

  The CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting, to the effect control board 12, a symbol designation command according to the determination result in the process of step S409 (step S410).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; NO), or if the process of step S410 is performed, the CPU 103 executes variation category determination (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIGS. The variation category determination in step S412 will be described later with reference to FIG.

After execution of the process of step S412, the CPU 103 performs one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. The setting for transmission is performed with respect to 12 (step S413), and the winning random number value determination process of step S220 is ended.
This is the end of the description of the winning-time random number value determination processing in step S220 using FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation category determination in step S412 of FIG. The variation category determination selects a determination table used to select a variation category determination table, selects a variation category determination table using the selected determination table, and executes a process of determining a variation category.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the ST state (step S4121). Whether the gaming state is the ST state or not is determined by the state (on state or off state) of the probability change flag indicating that the gaming state set in the game control flag setting unit 152 described in FIG. 8 is the ST state. can do.

  When it is determined in the process of step S 4121 that the gaming state is not the ST state (step S 4121; NO), the CPU 103 selects the determination table a (step S 4129), and determines a variation category (step S 4130). The determination table a is a determination table selected when not in the ST state, and is for selecting the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5A. The details of the determination tables a to f will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the ST state (step S4121; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the fluctuation number counter is within 10 (step S4122). Whether the value of the fluctuation number counter is within 10 can be determined by the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation number counter counts the number of variable displays after the end of the big hit. The fluctuation number counter counts the number of fluctuation displays until the count number reaches ST times (for example, 50 times) and ceases to be in the ST state or becomes a big hit.

  If it is determined in the process of step S 4122 that the value of the fluctuation number counter is within 10 (step S 4122; YES), the CPU 103 selects the determination table e (step S 4128) and determines the fluctuation category (step S 4130). ). The determination table e is a determination table in which the number of variations in the ST state is selected within 10 times, and selects the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5E.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is within 10 (step S4122; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the reach timing (step S4123). Whether or not it is the reach timing is variable in the ST state determined according to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination table 131 described in FIG. It can be judged by the number of times of display. For example, in the jackpot 10 shown in FIG. 7, the reach timing is the 14th, 20th, and 39th times. In the process of step S4123, the CPU 103 determines that the reach timing is reached when the value of the fluctuation counter is 14, 20, or 39.

  If it is determined in the process of step S4123 that the reach timing is not reached (step S4123; NO), the CPU 103 selects the determination table b (step S4127), and determines a variation category (step S4130). The determination table b is a determination table selected in the ST state at a timing other than the set reach timing (a timing at which the reach is limited), and is a variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5B. To choose.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the reach timing (step S4123; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the reach timing is the super reach (step S4124). Whether or not it is the super reach timing, the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the number of times of variable display in the ST state determined according to the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination table 131 It can be judged by For example, in the jackpot 10 shown in FIG. 7, the normal reach timing is the 14th and the super reach timing is the 20th and 39th. In the process of step S4124, the CPU 103 determines that the super reach timing is not reached when the value of the fluctuation counter is 14, and determines that the super reach timing is reached when the value of the fluctuation counter is 20 or 39.

  In the process of step S4124, when it is determined that it is not the super reach timing (step S4124; NO), the CPU 103 selects the determination table d (step S4126), and determines the variation category (step S4130). Determination table d is a determination table selected at timing when normal reach which is not the set super reach timing is determined in the ST state, and selects the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5D. It is

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the super reach timing (step S4124; YES), the CPU 103 selects the determination table c (step S4125), and determines the variation category (step S4130). The determination table c is a determination table selected at timing when the super reach is determined at the set super reach timing in the ST state, and selects the variation category determination table for determining the variation pattern described in FIG. 5C. It is
This is the end of the description of the variation category determination using FIG.

Next, the details of the determination tables a to f used for determining the variation category in the process of step S4130, which are selected in the process of step S4125 to step S4129 in FIG. 17, will be described using FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 18A shows the determination table a selected in the process of step S4129 of FIG. FIG. 18B shows the determination table b selected in the process of step S4127 of FIG. FIG. 18C is a determination table c selected in the process of step S4125 in FIG. FIG. 18D is a determination table d selected in the process of step S4126 of FIG. FIG. 18E shows the determination table e selected in the process of step S4128 in FIG. Further, FIG. 18F is an alternative determination table selected in place of the determination table b of FIG. 18B in the process of step S4127 of FIG.
The determination tables a to f can be stored in the ROM 101.

  In FIGS. 18A to 18F, each of the determination tables a to f includes a plurality of variation category determination tables. The variation category determination table is selected based on the special map display result (“lost” or “big hit”) determined in step S403 of FIG. 16 and the number of pending storages (1, 2 or 3 or 4). That is, the CPU 103 selects one variation category determination table according to the special map display result and the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages is based on, for example, a first pending storage number count value which is a storage value of a first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  In FIG. 18A, the determination table a includes four types of variation category determination tables of variation category determination tables C-TBL11, C-TBL21, C-TBL31, and C-TBL41. Further, in FIG. 18B, the determination table b includes four types of variation category determination tables of variation category determination tables C-TBL12, C-TBL22, C-TBL32, and C-TBL42. Further, in FIG. 18C, the determination table c includes four types of variation category determination tables of variation category determination tables C-TBL13, C-TBL23, C-TBL33, and C-TBL43. Also, in FIG. 18D, the determination table d includes four types of variation category determination tables of variation category determination tables C-TBL14, C-TBL24, C-TBL34, and C-TBL44. Further, in FIG. 18E, the determination table e includes four types of variation category determination tables of variation category determination tables C-TBL15, C-TBL25, C-TBL35, and C-TBL45. Further, in FIG. 18F, the determination table f includes four types of variation category determination tables of variation category determination tables C-TBL16, C-TBL26, C-TBL36, and C-TBL46.

  The determination table f is an alternative means of the determination table b. In the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 17, in the process of step S4123, when it is not the reach timing, the determination table b is selected. The determination table b is a determination table in which the variation category PA4 or PA5 of the super reach (loss) is not determined as described later with reference to FIG. 19B. However, in order to show the case where the effect of the super reach can be limited by the effect control CPU 120 even when the change category PA4 or PA5 is determined, a determination table f in which the change category PA4 can be determined is illustrated. Details of the processing of the effect control CPU 120 will be described later.

The CPU 103 selects one of the variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 18 based on the selection of the determination table described in FIG. 17, the special map display result, and the number of pending storages. For example, the case where the determination table a is selected in the process of step S4129 of FIG. 17 will be described. In FIG. 18A, when the special view display result is a loss and the number of reservations is 1, the CPU 103 selects a variation category determination table C-TBL11. Similarly, in FIG. 18A, when the special view display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table C-TBL 41.
In the present embodiment, in FIGS. 18A to 18F, when the special view display result is a big hit, the case where the variation category determination table is selected regardless of the number of pending storages is illustrated. However, when the special map display result is a big hit, different variation category determination tables may be selected according to the number of pending storages.
Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the pending storage number is four, and the pending storage number is divided into three categories to select the variation category determination table. However, the maximum value of the number of pending storages is not limited to four. For example, the maximum number of pending storages may be eight. Also, the classification of the number of pending storages is not limited to three. For example, the number of pending storages may be divided into two or four or more categories.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case of selecting the variation category determination table based on the special view display result and the number of pending storages has been exemplified, but the variation category determination table is selected based on conditions other than the special view display result and the number of pending storages You may For example, the variation category determination table may be selected in accordance with other gaming states such as the type of jackpot.
This is the end of the description of the determination table using FIG.

  Next, the details of the variation category determination table selected in the process described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18 will be described using FIGS. 19A to 19F (hereinafter, abbreviated as “FIG. 19”). The CPU 103 determines the variation category in the process of step S4130 of FIG. 17 based on the selected variation category determination table and the random value MR3.

First, a configuration example of the first variation category determination table will be described using FIG. 19A.
The variation category determination table C-TBL11 to the determination table C-TBL41 shown in FIGS. 19A (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table a shown in FIG. 18 (A). 19A (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL11, FIG. 19A (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL21, and FIG. 19A (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL31 FIG. 19A (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL 41.
Variation category determination table C-TBL11 to variation category determination table C-TBL41 each include assignment of a variation category and its content, and a range (decision value) of a numerical value to be compared with random value MR3 for variation category determination, It shows a variation category determined by the random value MR3. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the special view display result is a loss, the variation category is determined from among five types of PA1 to PA5. Also, when the special view display result is a big hit, the variation category is determined from three types of PB3 to PB5.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL11 shown in FIG. 19A (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is one. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL11, within the range of the decision value 0 to 99 of the random value MR3, no decision value is assigned to the variation category PA1, and 0 to 69 decision values are assigned to the variation category PA2. The judgment value of 70 to 96 is allocated to the fluctuation category PA3, the judgment value of 97 to 98 is allocated to the fluctuation category PA4, and the judgment value of 99 is allocated to the fluctuation category PA5. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL11 of FIG. 19A (A), the variation category PA1 is 0%, the variation category PA2 is 70%, the variation category PA3 is 27%, the variation category PA4 is 2%, and the variation category PA5 is determined at a rate of 1%.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the change category determination table C-TBL21 shown in FIG. 19A (B) is a change category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is 2 or 3. is there. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL21, 0 to 3 for variation category PA1, 4 to 88 for variation category PA2, 89 to 96 for variation category PA3, 97 to 98 for variation category PA4, and 99 determination values are assigned to the variation category PA5.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL 31 shown in FIG. 19A (C) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is four. In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL31, 0 to 63 for fluctuation category PA1, 64 to 88 for fluctuation category PA2, 89 to 96 for fluctuation category PA3, 97 to 98 for fluctuation category PA4, and 99 determination values are assigned to the variation category PA5.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the variation category determination table C-TBL 41 shown in FIG. 19A (D) is a variation category determination table to be selected when the special view display result is a big hit regardless of the number of reserved memories. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 41, determination values of 0 to 19 are assigned to the variation category PB3, 20 to 59 to the variation category PB4, and 60 to 99 to the variation category PB5.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the first variation category determination table using FIG. 19A.

Next, a configuration example of the second variation category determination table will be described using FIG. 19B. In the following description, the description of the items described in FIG. 19A will be omitted.
The variation category determination table C-TBL12 to the determination table C-TBL42 shown in FIGS. 19B (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table b shown in FIG. 18 (B). 19B (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL12, FIG. 19B (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL22, and FIG. 19B (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL32. FIG. 19B (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL42.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the change category determination table C-TBL12 shown in FIG. 19B (A) is a change category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is one. In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL12, the judgment value of the random value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the fluctuation category PA2. On the other hand, determination values are not assigned to PA1 and PA3 to PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL12 is selected, the non-reach (loss) variation category PA2 is always determined.
Since determination table b is selected when it is not reach timing in the ST state as described in FIG. 17, variation category determination table C-TBL12 to determination table C-TBL42 selected from determination table b Judgment values are assigned such that normal reach (loss) fluctuation category PA3 and super reach (loss) fluctuation categories PA4 and PA5 are not selected. Therefore, when it is not the reach timing in the ST state, the special figure display result can shorten the special figure fluctuation time when there is a loss, and the interest of the special figure game can be improved by improving the sense of speed.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the change category determination table C-TBL22 shown in FIG. 19B (B) is a change category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is 2 or 3. is there. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL22, determination values of 0 to 19 are assigned to the variation category PA1, and 20 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA2. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation category PA3, the fluctuation category PA4, and the fluctuation category PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 22 is selected, the variation category PA1 of shortened / non-reach (loss) or the variation category PA2 of non-reach (loss) is determined. The variation category determination table C-TBL22 increases the percentage of shortening and non-reach (loss) compared to the variation category determination table C-TBL12 in which the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, and the number of pending storages is 1. There is. By increasing the determination ratio of shortening and non-reach (loss), it is possible to shorten the special map fluctuation time.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the change category determination table C-TBL32 shown in FIG. 19B (C) is a change category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is four. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL32, determination values of 0 to 89 are assigned to the variation category PA1, and 90 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA2. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation category PA3, the fluctuation category PA4, and the fluctuation category PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 32 is selected, the variation category PA1 of shortened / non-reach (loss) or the variation category PA2 of non-reach (loss) is determined. In the case of the variation category determination table C-TBL32 in which the number of pending storages is 4 and the number of pending storages is 1 and the variation category determination table C-TBL22 in which the number of pending storages is 2 or 3 Compared with that, the ratio of shortening and non-reach (loss) is increasing. By increasing the determination ratio of shortening and non-reach (loss), it is possible to shorten the special map fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the variation category determination table C-TBL 42 shown in FIG. 19B (D) is a variation category determination table to be selected when the special view display result is a big hit regardless of the number of reserved memories. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 42, determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB4, and no determination value is assigned to the variation category PB3 and the variation category PB5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 42 is selected and the special view display result is a big hit, the variation category of the super reach α is selected.
According to the variation category determination table described in FIG. 19B, when the special chart display result is a loss, the non-reach is determined if the reach is not the reach timing in the ST state, and the effect of the super reach α is executed in the case of the big hit It will be done. Therefore, when the special drawing display result is a loss, the special drawing fluctuation time is shortened to increase the sense of speed of the special drawing game, and when the special drawing display result is a big hit, the super reach is determined to improve the interest. Can be
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the second variation category determination table using FIG. 19B.

Next, a configuration example of the third variation category determination table will be described using FIG. 19C.
The variation category determination table C-TBL13 to the determination table C-TBL43 shown in FIGS. 19C (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table c shown in FIG. 18C. 19C (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL13, FIG. 19C (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL23, and FIG. 19C (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL33 FIG. 19C (D) shows a change category determination table C-TBL 43.

As shown in FIG. 18C, the variation category determination table C-TBL13 shown in FIG. 19C (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is one. In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL13, the judgment value of the random value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the fluctuation category PA4. On the other hand, determination values are not assigned to PA1, PA2, PA3 and PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 13 is selected, the variation category PA4 of the super reach α (loss) is always determined.
In addition, since the determination table c is selected at the reach timing of the super reach in the ST state as described in FIG. 17, the variation category determination table C-TBL13 to the determination table C-TBL33 selected from the determination table c. In, the variation category PA4 of the super reach α (loss) is always determined even if the special map display result is a loss. By executing the reach timing of the super reach α (loss) at a predetermined reach timing, it becomes possible to set the upper limit number of executions to the reach effect corresponding to the super reach α in the ST state, and the execution of the super reach α Interest can be improved by raising the degree of expectation of the big hit by the number of times.

  The variation category determination table C-TBL23 shown in FIG. 19C (B) and the variation category determination table C-TBL33 shown in FIG. 19C (C) are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL13. That is, when the determination table c is selected, the variation category PA4 is always determined when the special figure display result is a loss, and the effect corresponding to the super reach α is executed. Since the variation category determination table C-TBL 23 and the variation category determination table C-TBL 33 are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL 13, the description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 18C, the variation category determination table C-TBL 43 shown in FIG. 19C (D) is a variation category determination table to be selected when the special view display result is a big hit regardless of the number of reserved memories. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 43, determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB4, and no determination value is assigned to the variation category PB3 and the variation category PB5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 43 is selected and the special view display result is a big hit, the variation category of the super reach α is selected.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the third variation category determination table using FIG. 19C.

Next, a configuration example of the fourth variation category determination table will be described using FIG. 19D.
The variation category determination table C-TBL14 to the determination table C-TBL44 shown in FIGS. 19D (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table d shown in FIG. 18 (D). 19D (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL14, FIG. 19D (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL24, and FIG. 19D (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL34. FIG. 19D (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL44.

As shown in FIG. 18D, the variation category determination table C-TBL14 shown in FIG. 19D (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is one. In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL14, the judgment value of the random value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the fluctuation category PA3. On the other hand, determination values are not assigned to PA1, PA2, PA4 and PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 14 is selected, the variation category PA3 of the normal reach (loss) is always determined.
Since determination table d is selected at the reach timing of normal reach in the ST state, as described in FIG. 17, in variation category determination table C-TBL14 to determination table C-TBL34 selected from determination table d. The change category PA3 of the normal reach (loss) is always determined even if the special view display result is a loss. By executing the reach timing of normal reach (loss) at a predetermined reach timing, it becomes possible to set the upper limit number of execution of reach production together with the production of super reach α in ST state, and the number of times of reach production execution The interest rate can be improved by raising the expectation of the big hit.

  The variation category determination table C-TBL 24 shown in FIG. 19D (B) and the variation category determination table C-TBL 34 shown in FIG. 19D (C) are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL 14. That is, when the determination table d is selected, the variation category PA3 is always determined when the special view display result is a loss, and the effect corresponding to the normal reach is executed. Since the variation category determination table C-TBL 24 and the variation category determination table C-TBL 34 are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL 14, the description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 18D, the variation category determination table C-TBL 44 shown in FIG. 19D (D) is a variation category determination table to be selected when the special view display result is a big hit regardless of the number of reserved memories. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 44, determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB3, and no determination value is assigned to the variation category PB4 and the variation category PB5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 44 is selected and the special view display result is a big hit, the variation category of the normal reach is selected.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the fourth variation category determination table using FIG. 19D.

Next, a configuration example of the fifth variation category determination table will be described using FIG. 19E.
The variation category determination table C-TBL15 to the determination table C-TBL45 shown in FIGS. 19E (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table e shown in FIG. FIG. 19E (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL15, FIG. 19E (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL 25 and FIG. 19E (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL 35 FIG. 19E (D) shows a variation category determination table C-TBL45.

As shown in FIG. 18E, the variation category determination table C-TBL15 shown in FIG. 19E (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is one. In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL15, the judgment value of the random value MR3 of 0 to 99 is assigned to the fluctuation category PA1. On the other hand, determination values are not assigned to PA2, PA3, PA4, and PA5. That is, when the variation category determination table C-TBL 15 is selected, the shortening / non-reach (loss) variation category PA1 is always determined.
Since determination table e is selected within 10 times of the number of changes in the ST state as described in FIG. 17, variation category determination table C-TBL15 to determination table C-TBL35 selected from determination table e Is always determined as a variation category PA1 of shortening and non-reach (loss). If the special map display result is lost within 10 times of the number of fluctuations in the ST state, the special drawing fluctuation time will be reduced 10 consecutive times, and the sense of speed will be improved to improve the interest it can.

  The variation category determination table C-TBL25 shown in FIG. 19E (B) and the variation category determination table C-TBL35 shown in FIG. 19E (C) are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL15. That is, when the determination table e is selected, the variation category PA1 is always determined when the special figure display result is a loss, and the effect corresponding to the shortening / non-reach is executed. Since the variation category determination table C-TBL 25 and the variation category determination table C-TBL 35 are the same as the variation category determination table C-TBL 15, the description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 18E, the variation category determination table C-TBL 45 shown in FIG. 19E (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special map display result is a big hit regardless of the number of reserved memories. . In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 45, determination values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PB1, and no determination value is assigned to the variation category PB4 and the variation category PB5. As the effect corresponding to PB1, as described in FIG. 5E, an immediate effect is executed. The sense of speed can be improved and the interest can be improved by executing the immediate effect when the number of changes in the ST state is 10 or less.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the fifth variation category determination table using FIG. 19E.

Next, a configuration example of a sixth variation category determination table will be described using FIG. 19F.
The variation category determination table C-TBL16 to the determination table C-TBL46 shown in FIGS. 19F (A) to (D) are variation category determination tables selected by the determination table f shown in FIG. 18 (F). 19F (A) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL16, FIG. 19F (B) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL26, and FIG. 19F (C) shows the variation category determination table C-TBL36 FIG. 19F (D) shows a change category determination table C-TBL46.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL16 shown in FIG. 19F (A) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is one. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL16, determination values of a random value MR3 of 0 to 69 and 70 to 99 are assigned to the variation category PA2 and the variation category PA4, respectively. On the other hand, determination values are not assigned to PA1, PA3 and PA5.
When the fluctuation category PA4 is determined based on the fluctuation category determination table C-TBL16, the CPU for effect control 120 executes the pseudo chain effect instead of executing the effect of the super reach α, and executes the reach effect Process to prohibit The processing content of the effect control CPU 120 will be described later.
The determination table f is selected instead of the determination table b when it is not the reach timing in the ST state, as described in FIG. 17, but the variation category determination table C-TBL 16 ... selected from the determination table f In the determination table C-TBL 46, it is assumed that the variation category PA4 of the super reach α (loss) is determined. Even when the variation category PA4 is determined, by limiting the effect of the super reach by the effect control CPU 120, the effect of the super reach can be substantially prevented from being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the upper limit number of execution of reach production, and it is possible to improve interest by raising the degree of expectation of the big hit by the number of times of execution of reach production.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the change category determination table C-TBL26 shown in FIG. 19F (B) is a change category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending memories is 2 or 3. is there. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL26, determination values of 0 to 3 are assigned to the variation category PA1, 4 to 88 to the variation category PA2, and 89 to 99 to the variation category PA4. Similar to the variation category determination table C-TBL16, no determination value is assigned to the variation category PA3 and the variation category PA5.
The variation category determination table C-TBL26 increases the determination ratio of shortening / non-reach (loss) compared to the variation category determination table C-TBL16 in which the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, and the number of pending storages is 1. There is. By increasing the determination ratio of shortening and non-reach (loss), it is possible to shorten the special map fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL 36 shown in FIG. 19F (C) is a variation category determination table selected when the special view display result is lost and the number of pending storages is four. In the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 36, determination values of 0 to 63 are assigned to the variation category PA1, 64 to 88 to the variation category PA2, and 89 to 99 to the variation category PA4. Similar to the variation category determination table C-TBL16, no determination value is assigned to the variation category PA3 and the variation category PA5.
In the case of the variation category determination table C-TBL36, the number of pending storages is 4 and the number of pending storages is 1 and the variation category determination table C-TBL36 is a variation category determination table C-TBL16. Compared with that, the ratio of shortening and non-reach (loss) is increasing. By increasing the determination ratio of shortening and non-reach (loss), it is possible to shorten the special map fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 18F, the variation category determination table C-TBL 46 shown in FIG. 19F (D) is a variation category determination table selected when the special map display result is a big hit regardless of the number of pending storages. . The setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 46 is the same as the setting example of the variation category determination table C-TBL 42 described with reference to FIG.
This is the end of the description of the configuration example of the sixth variation category determination table using FIG. 19F.

  This is the end of the description of the start winning determination process of step S101 in FIG. 13 using FIGS. 14 to 19F.

  Returning to FIG. 13 again, after executing the start winning determination process of step S101, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select and execute.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be "big hit", before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a process of deciding the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later. In the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111, the fluctuation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, using the random number value MR3 for variable category determination stored in step S218 of the start winning process, the variable category is determined as in step S412 of the winning random number value determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category which is the determination result, one of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101 is selected as one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the newly extracted random pattern value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination. Variation patterns may be determined. In the start winning process, in addition to the extraction and the like of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111. The fluctuation pattern may be determined using the random number value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the start winning processing.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 1 A first special view game (a special view game using a first special view) by the special symbol display device 4A or a second special view game by a second special symbol display device 4B (a special view using a second special view) A common timer measures the elapsed time regardless of whether it is a figure game). Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation processing in step S112 may be processing for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special view game or the second special view game by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Also, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, the special symbol stop processing in the case of one or both of the probability change state (high probability state) and the time saving state (high base state) The process of adding or resetting the counter value of the fluctuation number counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, the number of times the special figure game is executed in the high probability state (high probability state), the special figure in the time saving state (high base state) A process of determining whether the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number, and low probability by ending the probability variation control or time reduction control in which one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the time reduction state (high base state) are controlled. The variable game state transition process such as the process set to one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, and if the big hit flag is in the on state, the value of the special processing process flag is "4". Updated to Also, when the big hit flag is in the OFF state, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the variable display result becoming "big hit", etc., the process of performing the setting for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened may be set according to whether the big hit type is “16R positive variation big hit” or “8R positive variation big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the big hit type "16R probability variation big hit", while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the big winning a prize opening state to "29 seconds", opening the big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting the number of times to “16 times”, setting may be performed to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type "8R probability variation big hit", while setting the upper limit of the period to open the big winning opening to "29 seconds", the number of opening times of the big winning opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting “8 times”, setting may be performed to set the normally open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect as a rendering operation is performed to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc. It includes a process of waiting until the jackpot, and a jackpot after-game state transition process described later for setting for starting the probability change control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special view game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the number of second special view reservations is other than “0” at step S 231 (step S 231; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in second special view suspension storage unit 151 B As data, a random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result and a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting one, for example, by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. Shifts pending data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers “2” to “4”) in section 151B by one entry at a time (Step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the gaming control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special view game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is "0". Just do it.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is "0", the first special view game and the second special view are executed. When the game is on hold, the second special view game is executed prior to the first special view game. In addition, it is not limited to the aspect in which the second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game, and the game ball enters (passes through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) ) And the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winning prize (first start prize, second start prize) occurs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of first special view reservations is other than “0” (step S235; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in first special view suspension storage unit 151A. As data, random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision and numerical data which show random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision are read out respectively (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1 by, for example, subtracting 1 from the first pending memory number count value, and so on. Shifts pending data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers “2” to “4”) in section 151A upward by one entry (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S 237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S234 and S238, use the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, as a use table for determining which of “big hit” and “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in 16 (A). When using different display result determination tables (the first special view display result determination table and the second special view display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the starting opening buffer Although the value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, in the process of step S239, the variation special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the determined value assigned to each special image display result of "big hit" or "lost". Then, it is determined whether the special map display result is to be "big hit" or "loss" (step S240).

  After the special view display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (step S241). When it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “16R probability variation big hit” and “8R probability variation big hit”. In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to the jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the jackpot type determined Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “16R certainty big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and “8R certainty big hit” may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that the game is not a "big hit" (step S241; NO), or after the process of step S245 is executed, the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, A special special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the big hit type in the case of making a big hit game state (step S248).

After setting the finalized special symbol in step S248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. . If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in step S235 is "0" (step S235; YES), after performing predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a presentation control command (waiting customer demonstration designation command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.
This is the end of the description of the special symbol normal processing in step S110 using FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 13 again, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern to change the variation pattern. Decide.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined using the random number value MR3 as in the winning random number value determination process (step S220), but the winning random number value determination process (step S220) is executed. Even if the number of pending storages greatly differs between the time of day and the time of execution of the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the random number MR3 extracted in the winning random number value determination process is the same as in the variation pattern setting process. The value is used.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern.
The setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 21 is applied when the variation category is determined using the variation category determination table illustrated in FIG. 19A. That is, the setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern shown in 21 is applied when it is determined in step S 4121 described in FIG. 17 that the state is not the ST state. For example, in the diagrams exemplifying the variation category and the variation pattern described in FIGS. 5B to 5F, the case where only one variation pattern is set in one variation category is illustrated. Therefore, in the ST state, it is not necessary to determine the fluctuation pattern by the random value MR5. However, in the case where two or more fluctuation patterns are set in one fluctuation category in FIGS. 5B to 5F, a setting example of determination ratio of fluctuation patterns described below may be applied.
In addition, it is assumed that eight types of fluctuation pattern determination tables corresponding to the fluctuation categories are stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 21A is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table which is selected when the fluctuation category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach lost)” among the eight types described above. FIG. 21B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table selected when the fluctuation category is “PA2 (non-reach (losing))” among the above eight types. FIG. 21C is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table selected when the fluctuation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 21 (D) to 21 (H).

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing executed in step S113 of the special symbol process processing (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is on (step S291: YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start effect waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the hit start designation command is a buffer designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the area. After that, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the big hit flag is off (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a variation game state transition process (step S296). Subsequently, CPU 103 updates the value of the special view process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S 297), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

  FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation game state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the variation game state transition process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current game state is a low probability low base state (step S451). The CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. When it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the fluctuation time gaming state transition processing as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low base state is not the low probability state (step S451; YES), the value of the fluctuation number counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The fluctuation number counter is the number of times the special drawing game has been executed after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the number of times ST (number of probability variations) or the number of time reductions. The number of times of ST (the number of definite variations) is the number of times of execution of the special-figure game that executes the definite variation control. The number of times of time saving is the number of times of execution of the special drawing game for executing the time saving control. The number of times of ST (the number of probability variations) and the number of time reductions are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 13 and 24).

  Following the process of step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) (step S453), and reads the number of times of time saving (step S454). Following the process of step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether the current gaming state is the high certainty state (probable change state) (step S455). When the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. In step S455, when it is determined that the current gaming state is highly probable (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the fluctuation number counter is indicated by the number of times of ST read out in step S453 (the number of probability variations). It is determined whether the value is larger than (for example, 50 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 And the game state is set to the low certainty state (step S457), and the probability change control is ended.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the high certainty state (step S455; NO), the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of times ST If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the current gaming state is the high base state (time saving state) (step S458). When the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the high base state (time saving state). In step S458, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the high base state (time reduction state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 indicates the value of the fluctuation number counter indicated by the number of time reductions read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is larger than (for example, 50 times) (step S459). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is a value larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turns off. Then, the gaming state is set to the low base state (step S460), and the time saving control is ended.

  After the processing in step S460 or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (time reduction state) (step S458; NO), the value of the fluctuation number counter is indicated by the number of time reduction and is not larger If it is determined (step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state has become the low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the OFF state, the CPU 103 determines that the game state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST number (number of positive variations) to "0" (step S462), and sets the time reduction number The value is cleared to "0" (step S463), and the value of the fluctuation number counter is cleared to "0" (step S464).

  After executing the processing of step S464, the CPU 103 executes reach timing setting clear for clearing the setting of the reach timing (step S465). The reach timing is set in the game control counter setting unit 154 of FIG. 8 based on the jackpot type determination table described with reference to FIG. In the process of step S465, the CPU 103 clears the reach timing set in the game control counter setting unit 154. The reach timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S465, or when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state is not set (step S461; NO), the game state transition process during variation is not performed without executing steps S462, S463, and S464. Finish.
This is the end of the description of the variation game state transition processing in step S296 using FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit opening post process (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special process process flag is updated to "7", the timer initial determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time A value is set to the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not it is.

  If the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the jackpot end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high probability state (positive change state) by, for example, turning on the positive change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the time base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state to set the high base state (step S315). That is, by the processing of step S314 and step S315, when the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is set to the high probability high base state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the number of times of ST (the number of probability variations) to 50 times (step S316), and sets the time saving number to 50 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to "0" (step S318), and clears the value of the special view process flag to "0" (step S319).

After execution of the process of step S319, the CPU 103 sets the reach timing (step S320). The reach timing determines the number of changes for executing the reach effect described using FIG. 7, and is determined in the process of determining the jackpot type in step S409 in the winning random number value determination process (step S220) of FIG. It is determined based on the type of the big hit. The CPU 103 sets the reach timing shown in FIG. 7 in the game control counter setting unit 154 based on the determined type of the big hit.
In addition, in this embodiment, after big hit completion, it is always in ST state and illustrated the case where reach timing is set up. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the big hit ends, the ST state can be set. In that case, the process of setting the reach timing in step S320 may be performed when the ST state is reached.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case of executing the process of setting the reach timing in the big hit end process of step S117 is exemplified, however, the process of setting the reach timing is not limited to the big hit end process. For example, in the determination of whether or not the big hit flag in step S291 in the special symbol stop process (step S113) is in the on state, when the big hit flag is in the on state, processing to set the reach timing may be executed .
After executing the process of step S320, the CPU 103 ends the big hit end process of step S117.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (the number of definite variations) and the set value of the number of time reductions of 50 are the same value (both 50 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 50 times. Further, the set value of the number of STs (the number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit may be the same value (both 50 times). Further, the set value of the number of STs (the number of probability variations) in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (the number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit may be different values. In addition, the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R certainty variation big hit and the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 16R certainty variation big deal may be the same value (both 50 times). In addition, the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the time reduction number in the case of the 16R probability variation large loss. In addition, when the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variation big hit, and the big hit type buffer value is “2”. You may judge that it is 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, on the main board 11, in the start winning determination process of step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning combination designation command according to the start opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 is performed ( Transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special figure display result determined in step S219), step S403, etc. is performed (step S410), and the variation category command according to the variation category determined in step S412 The transmission setting for transmitting (step S413) is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage count notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, the start winning winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is executed by executing the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening winning combination designation command (the first start opening winning combination designation command or the second start opening winning combination designation command), the symbol specification command, Four commands of a variable category command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

  In addition, in main substrate 11, in special symbol normal processing of step S110, the special design symbol which becomes the variable indicatory result of special symbol making use of random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision and random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision etc In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for variation category determination, the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the determined special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designating command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, etc. Transmission setting for transmitting to the effect control board 12 is performed. When variable display is started by executing the command control process of the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command or The fluctuation pattern designation command and the like are collectively transmitted in one timer interrupt. In addition, it is not limited to what is collectively transmitted in 1 timer interruption, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control process of step S17 for every timer interruption.

  That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to the big hit gaming state in the special symbol normal processing (step S110). It is determined whether or not it is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), determination of a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbol is performed, and the content determined by each effect control command is It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Also, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) sets it as a "big hit". Judgment as to whether the jackpot gaming state is controlled or not, judgment of a rough variable display mode (variation category) of the decorative symbol, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by the respective production control commands are transmitted to the production control board 12 Be done.

  In the case of a big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), the number of STs (number of probability variations) and the number of time reductions are both 50 in the big hit end process of step S117, the gaming state is high probability high base Set to state. In addition, the fluctuation number counter is counted up in each fluctuation when the gaming state is the high probability high base state (step S452), when the fluctuation number counter exceeds the ST number of times (the number of probability variation), the gaming state is low probability state Is set (step S 457), and the game state is set to the low base (step S 460) when the fluctuation number counter exceeds the time saving number.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, control to be a rendering control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S74, an effect control process process is performed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, various effect devices such as display operation of effect image in display area of image display device 5, sound output operation from speaker 8, light emission operation of lamp 9, drive operation of effect model, etc. With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using the above, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random number is counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data representing the is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S72.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., whereby the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is It is determined whether there is any (step S501). At this time, if there is no reception command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is ended.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 confirms, for example, MODE data of the reception command.

  If there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a power failure recovery process (step S520). Details of the power failure recovery process of step S520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power failure recovery process.

In FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S5201). As described with reference to FIG. 11, the power failure recovery designation command (9200H) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when the predetermined condition (steps SS007 to S009) is satisfied after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S44). When transmitting a power failure recovery designation command, the CPU 103 can transmit a plurality of commands described in FIG. 3 together. In the present embodiment, the game status specification command (95XXH), the special winning opening open notification command (A1XXH), the special winning opening open notification command (A2XXH), and the pending storage as commands transmitted together with the power failure recovery specification command. The case of transmitting the number notification command (C1XX, C2XX) will be described. The command transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command is not limited to the above. For example, a reach timing designation command for specifying the reach timing 1 to the reach timing 3 described in FIG. 7 may be transmitted. Since the received command is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, the effect control CPU 120 performs. In the following processing, the command received from the effect control command reception buffer is read out.
The following describes a case where a reach timing designation 1 command, a reach timing designation 2 command, and a reach timing 3 designation command for specifying the reach timing together with the power failure recovery designation command are transmitted.
If the received command is not a power failure recovery designation command (step S5201; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the power failure recovery process of step S520.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a power failure recovery designating command (step S5201; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the recovery process based on the received command in steps S5202 to S5206.

First, when the gaming state designation command (95XXH) is included in the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 performs recovery processing according to the gaming state designation command (step S5202). The gaming state designation command includes a plurality of types of commands for designating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 as described with reference to FIG. For example, when the time saving state specification command (9501H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 can restore the rendering device to the setting of the rendering device according to the time saving state. Further, when the probability change state designation command (9502H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 can restore the effect device to the setting of the effect device according to the probability change state.
In the process of step S5202, when the probability change state designation command is received, it indicates that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (ST state) before the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for recovering a reach history display described later, when the probability change state designation command is received. In the present embodiment, the case where the probability change state designation command is received together with the power failure recovery designation command is illustrated. However, the reception of the definite change state specification command may not be confirmed in the power failure recovery process of step S520. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the probability change state designation command has been received in the variable display start setting process of step S171 described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in addition to the definite variation state designation command, the reach timing designation 1 command to the reach timing designation 3 command may be received. By receiving the reach timing in the power failure recovery process, even if the change category designation command (C6XX) of the super reach α (loss) described in FIG. 19F is performed, the effect of the super reach is executed when the reach timing is not reached. Instead, it is possible to carry out pseudo-series effects and the like instead.

  After execution of the process of step S5202, CPU120 for production control performs restoration processing according to the notification command during big winning opening being open, when the big winning opening opening notifying command (A1XXH) is included in the reception command. (Step S5203). After execution of the processing of step S5203, the effect control CPU 120 performs recovery processing according to the notification icon after opening the special winning opening when the reception command includes the notification command after opening the special winning opening (A2XXH). (Step S5204). After the execution of the process of step S5204, if the reception command includes the pending storage number notification command (C1XXH or C2XXH), the effect control CPU 120 performs recovery processing according to the pending storage number notification command (step S5203). After the execution of the process of step S5205, if the effect control command is included in the received command, the effect control CPU 120 performs recovery processing according to the effect control command (step S5203). The effect control command received in step S5206 is the other command described in FIG. 3 or another command, and the type of command is arbitrary.

After executing the processing of step S5206, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the power failure recovery flag (step S5207). The power failure recovery flag is a flag that records that a power failure recovery designation command has been received, and indicates that power failure recovery is in progress in the on state. In the present embodiment, variable display recovery processing including reach history display setting processing for restoring reach history display and performing display again on the image display device 5 to be described later is illustrated as a power failure recovery processing, so variable display recovery processing is performed. It is assumed that the power failure recovery flag is turned off when it is executed. However, the power failure recovery flag may be turned off when another power failure recovery process is executed.
This is the end of the description of the power failure recovery process of step S520 using FIG.

  Returning again to FIG. 26, after executing the processing of step S520, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is the first starting opening prize designation command (step S502). Then, when it is the first starting opening winning combination designating command (step S502; YES), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Just do it.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command (step S502; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (step S504). Then, when it is the second starting opening winning combination designating command (step S504; YES), the second holding storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command (step S506). If it is determined in step S506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S507; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command (step S508). Then, when it is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If it is determined in step S508 that the received command is not the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510). Then, when it is the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (step S511) .

  When the received command is the symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), or when the received command is the variation category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After performing any of the processes in step S503, if the first pending storage count notification wait time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received one before the received command, the received command is not selected. (1) After the start winning combination reception command buffer 194A is stored at the top of the free space (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  Also, if the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), or if the received command is a variation category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, and S509. , And S511, if the second pending storage count notification wait time is set in the processing of step S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command Is stored at the top of the free space in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  If the first pending storage count notification command is received together with the first change start command, the pending storage count notification command may not be stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  When the second pending storage count notification command is received together with the second change start command, the pending storage count notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; NO), setting according to the other received commands is performed (step S513), and the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a game state specification command, the game state specification command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether the time is short or not.

  Start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command or second start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number As in the notification command), the effect control command received from the main substrate 11 when the start winning combination occurs is also referred to as a command at the start winning combination. In addition, the first holding storage number notification command, the second holding storage number notification command, the first starting opening winning combination designation command, and the second starting opening winning combination designation command are also referred to as holding storage information. Further, the symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the reception command is any of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area.

In addition, when the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, which of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command is the reception command It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area.
This is the end of the description of the command analysis processing in step S74 using FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process performed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determination process (step S150). In the effect determination process at the time of winning, the CPU 120 for effect control first checks the storage content in the start winning time reception command buffer (the first start winning time reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning time reception command buffer 194B) or Determine the display mode (also referred to as the display mode at the time of addition) of the pending display at the time of making additional display in the start winning a prize storage display area 5H, and the process of determining whether or not the starting opening winning a prize designation command is received as a reception command. Processing etc. are executed.

  After execution of the effect determination process at the time of winning in step S150, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, any one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 as described below Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 5 is to be started, and a process of displaying a process of executing a demonstration effect (display of customer waiting demonstration). When it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 4A or second special symbol display device 4B. Processing to determine the finalized decoration pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. in order to perform variable display of other various display operations, or by shifting the first hold display or the second hold display Including a process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to an active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a process of determining various effects (for example, main notice effect), etc. There is. Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. The various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. Specifically, based on the read control data (process data), the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and causes the image display device 5 to display it on the screen, and performs audio control of the effect sound signal. Control of various effects such as control of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 to the substrate 13 and control of outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 to control the lamp 9 to turn on / off / blink is executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol has been read out from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received, etc. The finalized display of the finalized decorative design (final stop design), which is the result of the variable display of the decorative design, is displayed. If the finalized display is made to display the finalized decorative symbol in response to the end code being read out from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed Even if the effect control command from the main substrate 11 is not used, the finalized display can be derived and displayed autonomously on the effect control substrate 12 side, and the variable display result can be determined. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In this special drawing waiting process, processing for counting the number of times of ST (number of probability variations) and the number of time reductions, processing for updating the value of the effect number counter, processing for changing the gaming state according to the value of the effect number counter, etc. Can be included. In this special view-per-wait process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to "4" when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol At the same time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

  The jackpot start process of step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". This big hit start process is executed before the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened, and a process for executing fanfare effect or an effect executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened (for example, It includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "5".

  The process in the round of step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". The processing during the round is executed when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the open state, and the effect when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the open state (e.g. Set the processing to execute the effect corresponding to (eg, the effect corresponding to the normal song, the effect corresponding to the special song, etc.) to be performed when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the closed state Processing etc. are included. Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "6".

  The post-round process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the open state. When the special winning opening open notification command from the main substrate 11 is received, an effect to be performed when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song Setting the effect etc.) and updating the value of the effect process flag to "5". Further, when the hit end designation command from the main substrate 11 is received, the ending effect is set, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7".

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S177 is processing that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “7”. This big hit end post process is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, processing to execute ending effect, processing to set the gaming state, and set the number of times ST (number of probability variation) and time reduction Processing etc. can be included. Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process performed in step S170 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is reception of a first change start command (or a second change start command) (step S1000).

  If it is determined in step S1000 that the first fluctuation start command (or the second fluctuation start command) has not been received (step S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the demonstration effect flag is on or not. It determines (step S1002). The demonstration in-progress flag is a flag indicating whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration effect flag is in the on state (for example, value "1"), it indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration effect flag is in the off state (for example, value "0") Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display has not been performed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not in the on state (step S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demo specification command is received (step S1004). If it is determined in step S1004 that no customer waiting demo specification command has been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1004 that the customer waiting demo specification command is received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration effect flag is set to the on state (step S1006), and according to the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display) The selected process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and the effect control process timer is started (step S1010). As a result, on the basis of the reception of the customer wait demo specification command, demonstration effect (display of customer wait demonstration) is started.
Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is ended.
In the present embodiment, the variable display start waiting process of step S170 has been described as the condition for starting the demonstration effect to determine whether or not the customer waiting demo specification command is received, but the demonstration effect is started. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display stop. Also, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in the gaming state by a sensor or the like.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, the stick controller 31A). It is determined whether or not there is a predetermined operation (e.g., operation by the push button 31B) (step S1012). If it is determined in step S1012 that a predetermined operation has not been made (step S1012; NO), the variable display start waiting process is ended. That is, the demonstration effect is continued.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect adjustment display (step S1013).

The effect adjustment display is an aspect of the effect adjustment means. In the effect adjustment display, adjustment of the effect means is performed by "display". The effect adjustment display is performed, for example, by displaying an icon or the like indicating the setting status of the effect means on the display screen of the image display device 5.
The effect means is, for example, a sound output means such as the speaker 8 or the like, and a light emitting means such as the LED 9 or the like. When the effect means is a sound output means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, an icon display for volume adjustment displayed on the image display device 5. When the effect means is a light emitting means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, an icon display for brightness adjustment displayed on the image display device 5.
The player visually confirms the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and, for example, the volume of the effect means with the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B described in FIG. , Adjust the brightness etc.

  The appropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like as the rendering means and the appropriate brightness of the LED 9 as the presentation means improve the rendering effect for the player. On the other hand, an inappropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like or an inappropriate luminance of the LED 9 may cause disadvantages such as giving a player an unpleasant feeling.

The effect adjustment display is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 based on the process data described with reference to FIG. That is, the control content of the rendering operation such as display, change, and deletion of the rendering adjustment display is set in advance in the process data. For example, in the process data, it is possible to set control content for displaying the setting status of the volume and luminance of the effect means by an icon or the like. Also, in the process data, control content is set to change the effect adjustment display (increase or decrease of the volume display, etc.) when the player operates the push button 31B or the cross key to change the setting of the volume and brightness. Can. Further, in the process data, the control content for deleting the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the player operates the push button 31B or the cross key, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. Can be set.
After the process of step S1013, the variable display start waiting process (step S170) is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1000 that the first change start command (or the second change start command) is received (step S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the demonstration effect flag is on or not. It determines (step S1022). If it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026), and the variable display start waiting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not in the on state (step S1022; NO), the processing of step S1024 is omitted (skipped), and the value of the presentation process flag corresponds to variable display start setting processing After updating the value to “1” (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 30, first, the effect control CPU 120 reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special view display result is "loss" (step S522; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) constituting the lost combination (step). S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data representing a random number for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to and the like, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In the process of step S 524, a finalized decorative symbol to be a predetermined chance symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol advance is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S522; NO), that is, if the special view display result is "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)", the CPU 120 for effect control Determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) constituting the big hit combination (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., it will be displayed in stop on the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display 5 Decide on a decorative pattern with the same symbol number.

  In addition, when determining the combination of the finalized decorative symbol in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final ornament according to the type of the big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit), presence or absence of promotion effect, etc. The symbol may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a big hit combination for exclusive use of 16R positive variation big hit (for example, one in which three identical decorative designs are arranged side by side) and a big hit combination exclusively for 8R positive variation big hit (for example, the same same ornament design even number In the embodiment in which three pieces are arranged side by side, in the case of a 16R probability variation big hit, it is sufficient to decide either the 16R probability variation big hit dedicated combination or the 8R probability variation big hit combination specifically as a definite decoration pattern . At this time, when a big hit combination dedicated to 8R certainty big hit is determined as a finalized decorative symbol, it is sufficient to be notified that it is a 16R true variable big hit between the end of eight rounds as a promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, it may be decided to determine the 8R probability variation big hit dedicated combination or a big hit combination as the decoration symbol.

  In this embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, the special control display result is “big hit (2R probability variation big hit (probability variation))”, the presentation control The CPU 120 may determine a combination of a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit (probability).

  After executing either the process of step S524 or the process of step S528, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display recovery process (step S529). The variable display recovery process restores the effect mode of the variable display of the decoration pattern including the recovery of the reach history display when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Processing. The variable display recovery process in step S529 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display recovery process.
In FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the power failure recovery flag is in the on state. The power failure recovery flag is turned on in the power failure recovery flag on process of step S5207 of the power failure recovery process (step S520) of FIG. That is, the power failure recovery flag is a flag that is turned on when the power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 11.
If it is determined that the power failure recovery flag is not in the on state (step S520; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display recovery process of step S529.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery flag is in the on state (step S520; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the power failure recovery flag in the off state (step S5292). After executing the process of step S5292, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display recovery process (step S5293). The variable display recovery process is an image display based on information such as the gaming state, large winning opening open state, number of pending storages, etc. set in the process of step S5202 to step S5206 in the power failure recovery process (step S520) of FIG. The effect screen to be displayed on the device 5 may be restored, and the display screen such as a background image when displaying a reach history in the ST state described later may be restored.

After executing the process of step S5293, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the ST state (step S5294). The determination as to whether or not it is in the ST state is made based on whether or not the received game state designation command (probable change state designation command 9502H) is recorded in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. You can
If it is determined that it is not in the ST state (step S5294; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display recovery process of step S529.

On the other hand, when determining that it is in the ST state (step S5294; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes reach history display setting for recovering the reach history (step S5295). The process of reach history display setting in step S5295 is to set an effect control pattern used in reach history display effect described later with reference to FIG. The reach history display effect for displaying the reach history is an effect mode in which the player is notified that the super reach has been performed when the effect of the super reach (α) is executed when the gaming state is the ST state. is there. For example, when there are four types of effect modes (for example, images displayed on the image display device 5) of super reach (α), the reach history is displayed in a predetermined (implemented) effect mode. The player is notified of the effect mode of the reaper reach α that has already been implemented and the effect mode of the reaper reach α that has not been performed. By displaying the reach history, the player can confirm the executed super reach effect, and the interest can be improved.
In the reach history display effect, as with the effect of super reach, effects using the effect device are executed based on the effect control pattern to be set. The effect device is, for example, a movable member provided in the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model. That is, in the reach history display effect, the image display using the image display device 5, the sound output using the speaker 8, the lighting display using the lamp 9, the operation of the movable member of the effect model alone or in combination Shall be implemented.

  If the effect control board 12 does not back up the data for displaying the reach history, the data for displaying the reach history will be lost if the supply of electricity to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed and the power failure recovery designation command and the positive change state designation command are received, the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting for recovering the reach history in the process of step S5295.

In the present embodiment, the case of executing the reach history display setting process in the variable display restoration process of step S529 of the variable display start process (step S171) is exemplified. However, the reach history display setting process is executed, for example, in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) executed after receiving the first change start command (or the second change start command) described with reference to FIG. May be
This is the end of the description of the variable display recovery processing in step S529 using FIG.

  Referring back to FIG. 30 again, after executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 executes the holding and digesting process (step S530). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the change is displayed on the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the present decorative symbol is linked to the first special figure game), the first start winning memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 5HL is displayed on the active display area AHA (a special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL ).

  More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL to the active display area AHA and causes the active display to be displayed. By setting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the set effect control pattern, to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. Active display area AHA displays an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of area 5HL. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special drawing game.

  In addition, in the process of step S530, when there is a hold display other than the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 performs the other hold display first When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR after shifting in the start winning storage display area 5HL, the other hold display is shifted in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the reserve processing of step S530, the CPU for effect control 120 executes a process of effect control pattern set (step S532). In the processing of the effect control pattern set, the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is set as the usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 as the usage pattern. The details of the effect control pattern set in step S532 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control pattern set.
In FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the ST state (step S5321). In the determination as to whether or not it is in the ST state, similarly to the process of step S5294 described in FIG. 31, the probability change state specification command received in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is recorded The decision can be made depending on whether the While the process of step S5294 is executed only once at the time of power failure recovery, the process of step S5321 is a process that is repeatedly executed even when it is not at the time of power failure recovery.

When determining that it is not in the ST state (step S5321; NO), the CPU for effect control 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step S5322). To set the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is to set the effect control pattern which is not the effect control pattern for executing the specific effect set in the process of step S5326 and step S5328 described below .
Note that the effect control pattern set in step S5322 may include process data for performing variable display of small symbols exemplified as special identification information corresponding to variable display of identification information. The small symbol indicates that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, which is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the decorative symbol. For example, when the small design interferes with the display of the decoration design by displaying a predetermined image by the predetermined effect in the image display 5, the decoration design is reduced to a part of the image display 5 instead of the decoration design. Is displayed. By displaying the small design, even if the decorative design can not be displayed due to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the decorative display is being variably displayed. The process data for executing the variable design of the small symbols may be included in the effect control pattern of the predetermined effect set in step S529.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is the ST state (step S5321; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change is the super reach (step S5323). The determination as to whether or not it is the super reach can be made based on the variation pattern included in the variation category command transmitted from the main substrate 11. In the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 5, in the case of not being in the ST state, the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach α is transmitted.
If it is determined not to be the super reach (step S5323; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of the effect control pattern set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of step S5322.

  On the other hand, when determining that it is a super reach (step S5323: YES), the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether it is a reach timing (step S5324). Whether or not it is the reach timing may be determined, for example, by receiving a reach timing designation command indicating the reach timing together with the power failure recovery designation command. When the reach timing designation command is not used, the effect control CPU 120 can not know the reach timing. Therefore, when the reach timing designation command is not used, it is regarded as the reach timing. Whether to use the reach timing designation command can be set, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191.

  If it is determined that it is the reach timing (step S5324; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of reach effect type determination to determine the type of super reach effect corresponding to the change pattern of the super reach α (step S5325) ). Here, the details of the reach effect type determination in step S5325 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the reach effect type determination in step S5325.
In FIG. 33, the CPU 120 for effect control executes reach history reading processing for reading the reach history (step S5325). The reach history reading process executed in step S5325 is a process of reading a reach history recorded that the effect of super reach has been executed when the gaming state is the ST state. In the reach history, for example, whether or not the reach effect type has been executed (is executed) is recorded for each reach effect type described later with reference to FIG. The reach history can be recorded, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191 described with reference to FIG. 10A, and in the process of step S5325, the reach history recorded in the effect control flag setting unit 191 can be read. . By reading the reach history, the effect control CPU 120 can determine which reach effect type has been executed.

  After executing the process of step S53251, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach effect type (step S53252). In the process of determining the reach effect type in step S53252, one reach effect type determination ratio table is selected from the reach history read in the process of step S53251, and the determination set in the selected reach effect type determination ratio table is made Based on the ratio, 1 reach production classification is decided. In this embodiment, the case of determining one reach effect type out of four reach effect types of super reach A to super reach D is shown.

After execution of the processing of step S53252, the effect control CPU 120 executes reach history update processing to update the reach history (step S53253). The reach history update process of step S53253 records that the reach effect type determined in the process of step S53252 has been executed. The reach history update process can be executed, for example, by updating the reach history recorded in the effect control flag setting unit 191. After executing the process of step S53253, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process of determining the reach effect type (step S5325).
This is the end of the explanation of the reach effect type determination using FIG.

Next, the reach effect type determination ratio table will be described using FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a reach effect type determination ratio table corresponding to the reach history.
In FIG. 34, FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D) show transition of selection of the reach effect type determination ratio table when super reach effect is executed in the order of super reach B → super reach A → super reach D. It shows. In the present embodiment, the super reach presentation is performed in the order of super reach B → super reach A → super reach D and the reach production type determination ratio table is exemplified in the case where the reach history is recorded, When the effects of the reach are performed in another order, the reach effect type determination ratio table is selected according to the reach history.

  In each of FIGS. 34 (A) to (D), the reach effect type indicates four types of super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 7, the reach timing is set three times to reach timings 1 to 3. Therefore, when execution of the super reach production with a loss is restricted in the change frequency which is not a reach timing, it becomes big hit by the production of the 4th super reach by all means.

  FIG. 34A shows a reach effect type determination ratio table when the effect of super reach has not been executed even once after the gaming state has become the ST state. That is, when the effect of super reach has not been executed even once after the gaming state has become ST state, the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34 (A) is selected. Similarly, FIG. 34 (B) shows the reach effect type determination ratio to be selected when the effect of the super reach B is executed after the gaming state becomes the ST state. FIG. 34C shows a reach effect type determination ratio to be selected when effects of super reach A and super reach B are executed after the gaming state becomes ST state. Further, FIG. 34 (D) shows the reach effect type determination ratio to be selected when the effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D are executed after the gaming state becomes ST state. . In this embodiment, in addition to the reach effect type determination ratio table illustrated in FIGS. 34A to 34D, a reach effect type determination ratio table (not shown) corresponding to the reach history is selected. That is, when the reach effect type of super reach is 4 types, there are a total of 15 types of reach effect type determination ratio tables of selection 0 → 1 type, selection 1 → 4 types, selection 2 → 6 types, selection 3 → 4 types It can. In addition, when the reach effect type is three types, a total of seven types of reach effect type determination ratio tables may exist similarly.

  In FIG. 34 (A), since the effect of super reach has not been executed even once after entering the ST state, “0” indicating that the reach history of super reach A to C has not been executed is recorded. ing. In the determination ratio in FIG. 34 (A), 40% of Super Reach A, 30% of Super Reach B, 20% of Super Reach C, and 10% of Super Reach D are set for each reach effect type. . That is, when the effect of super reach is not yet executed after the ST state, the reach effect type is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

In addition, although the case where it sets so that a determination ratio may differ according to reach production classification was illustrated in this embodiment, you may set a determination ratio so that it may become the same ratio by reach presentation classification.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reach history is recorded for each reach effect type, and the four types of super reach are exemplified to be executed only once. However, the same reach effect type may be performed twice or more. In that case, the reach history is recorded only the number of times of execution. When only the number of times of execution is recorded in the reach history, the reach effect type may be one type or a plurality of types.

FIG. 34B shows a reach effect type determination ratio table to be selected when the effect of the super reach B is executed after the gaming state is in the ST state. That is, the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34B is selected when the reach history read in the process of step S53251 in FIG. 33 indicates that the effect of the super reach B has been executed. In the reach history of Super Reach B, “1” is set, which indicates that the effect of Super Reach B has been executed. The effect control CPU 120 can collate the reach history read in the process of step S53251 with the reach history.
In the determination ratio in FIG. 34 (B), 50% of Super Reach A, 0% of Super Reach B, 30% of Super Reach C, and 20% of Super Reach D are set for each reach effect type. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine the reach effect type according to, for example, the generated random value and the determination ratio. Here, since the determination ratio of super reach B is “0%”, the effect of super reach B executed once is not executed until the reach history is cleared in the process of step S465 in FIG.
That is, the execution of the super reach effect, which is executed once in the ST state and displayed as executed in the reach history, is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by not executing the super reach effect once executed.

FIG. 34C shows a reach effect type determination ratio table to be selected when the effects of super reach B and super reach A are executed after the gaming state is in the ST state. In the reach history of the super reach A and the super reach B, “1” indicating that the effects of the super reach A and the super reach B have been executed is recorded. That is, in the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34C, when the reach history read in the process of step S53251 in FIG. 33 indicates that the effects of super reach A and super reach B have been executed. It is selected.
The determination ratio in FIG. 34 (C) is set such that Super Reach A is 0%, Super Reach B is 0%, Super Reach C is 55%, and Super Reach D is 45% for each reach effect type. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine the reach effect type according to, for example, the generated random value and the determination ratio. Here, since the determination ratio of super reach A and super reach B is “0%”, the effects of super reach A and super reach B executed once are cleared in the process of step S 465 in FIG. Will not be run until.

FIG. 34D shows a reach effect type determination ratio table to be selected when effects of super reach B, super reach A, and super reach D are executed after the gaming state is in the ST state. In the reach history of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, “1” indicating that the effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D are performed is recorded. That is, in the reach effect type determination ratio table shown in FIG. 34D, the effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D have already been executed for the reach history read in the process of step S53251 in FIG. Is selected to indicate.
The determination ratio in FIG. 34D is set such that Super Reach A is 0%, Super Reach B is 0%, Super Reach C is 100%, and Super Reach D is 0% for each reach effect type. . The effect control CPU 120 can determine the reach effect type according to, for example, the generated random value and the determination ratio. Here, since the determination ratio of super reach A, super reach B and super reach D is “0%”, the presentation of super reach A, super reach B and super reach D executed once has a reach history of FIG. It will not be executed until it is cleared in the process of step S465. Further, as described in FIG. 7, the reach timing is set three times, and the effect of the super reach of the loss is limited by the number of changes not being the reach timing, so the super reach C shown in FIG. 34 (D) is executed. Sometimes it will be a production of super reach based on the variation pattern of super reach (big hit).

In addition, the reach production classification determination ratio table illustrated in FIG. 34 illustrated the case where four types of super reach of super reach A to D are selected. However, the selected super reach is not limited to four. For example, the selected super reach may be one to three or five or more.
Further, in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 7, when the reach timing is at most four times, all types of super reach of super reach A to D shown in FIG. 34 are implemented. However, for example, when the set reach timing is at most three times or less, the number of super reach implemented in FIG. 34 is also at most three or less. On the other hand, when the reach timing is five times or more, at least one of the super reach A to D is performed twice.
Further, the reach effect type determination ratio table illustrated in FIG. 34 is a reach effect type determination ratio table when at least three types of super reach effects among super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D are executed. It shows the transition. However, the reach effect type determination ratio table may be the case where the effect of super reach is not executed at all in the ST number (50 times) or the effect of super reach is performed once or twice. The reach effect type determination ratio table is selected in each case. For example, when the effect of super reach is executed only once in the ST state, the selection of the reach effect type determination ratio table is once.
Moreover, although the case where the determination ratio is a fixed ratio determined in advance according to the reach history is shown in the present embodiment, the determination ratio may be variable according to a predetermined condition. For example, the determination ratio may be variable according to the situation such as the operation of the push button 31B by the player.
Above, description of the reach production classification determination ratio table using FIG. 34 is complete | finished, and description of reach production classification determination of step S5325 is complete | finished.

  Referring back to FIG. 32 again, after executing the process of step S5325, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the reach history display effect (step S5326). The effect control pattern corresponding to the reach history display effect includes effect control data for displaying the reach history on the image display device 5 illustrated with reference to FIG. That is, the effect control pattern for notifying the player of the reach history is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 5324 that the reach timing is not reached (step S 5324; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a big hit is made (step S 5327). The determination as to whether or not the jackpot is successful can be made by the variable display result notification command. If it is determined that a big hit (step S5327; YES). The effect control CPU 120 executes a reach effect type determination process (step S5325).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 5324 that the reach timing is not reached (step S 5324; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a big hit is made (step S 5327). The determination as to whether or not the jackpot is successful can be made by the variable display result notification command. If it is determined that a big hit (step S5327; YES). The effect control CPU 120 executes a reach effect type determination process (step S5325).

On the other hand, when it is judged that it is not a big hit (step S5327; NO). The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect (step S5328).
The pseudo series effect is illustrated as an effect to be executed in order to avoid the execution of the super reach effect. In the present embodiment, even when the variation category command indicating the variation pattern of the super reach (loss) is received in the variation state which is not the reach timing in the ST state, execution of the effect of the super reach is performed in the CPU for effect control 120 It is a limitation. That is, in the alternative embodiment in which the determination determination table f described in FIG. 18F is selected instead of the determination table b selected in step S4127 of FIG. 17, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 5F is selected. The effect control CPU 120 may receive a fluctuation category command indicating a fluctuation pattern of PA4-1 (super reach α (loss)). For the judgment as to whether or not it is the reach timing in step S5324 in FIG. 32 and the judgment as to whether it is the big hit in step S5327 if it is not the reach timing (step S; NO), the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. If the determination table b is used and the variation pattern is determined, the process of step S5323 is determined to be super reach (step S5323; YES), for effect control The CPU 120 may execute the process of step S5325 without performing the processes of steps S5324 and S5327.
In the present embodiment, in the ST state, even when the variation pattern of the super reach (loss) is received at the variation number that is not the reach timing, when the upper limit is set to the execution number of the super reach effect, the reach By not executing the super reach at the change count that is not the timing, it is possible to prevent the upper limit value of the super reach effect from being exceeded.
In the case where the specific variable display pattern is determined in the ST state, the effect of the pseudo continuous change is performed until the display result is derived from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information, thereby achieving the super Limit the execution of reach production. Here, since the special figure fluctuation time is a special figure fluctuation time of super reach production, for example, when normal reach production or non-reach production is executed instead of super reach production, there is a sense of discomfort with a wasteful long variable display The presentation will be performed, and the interest may decrease. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest by executing a pseudo-remitting effect that repeats the variable display of the loss many times instead of the super reach effect, thereby performing a sense of discomfort. Become.

After executing the processing of step S5322, the processing of step S5326, or the processing of step S5328, the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing of the effect control pattern set (step S532).
This is the end of the description of the processing of the effect control pattern set (step S532) using FIG.

Returning again to FIG. 30, after executing the process of step S532, the CPU for effect control 120 sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and effect control The process timer is started (step S535), and the rendering device (the rendering component) such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S536).
Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 digests the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable control of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the first special view game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most among the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening winning combination specified The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the divided command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and in the process of step S538, in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command, The information stored in the first read advance notice buffer 194C or the second read notice notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 etc. is also deleted or shifted, and then the value of the effect process flag is variably displayed. After the value is updated to "2" (step S539), the variable display start setting process is ended.
This is the end of the description of the available display start setting process using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variable display effect process of step S172 executed in the effect control process process of step S75 of FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process.
In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one from the value of the effect control process timer (step S601) and subtracts one from the value of the fluctuation time timer (step S602). The variable time timer is a timer for measuring a fluctuation time, and is a special figure fluctuation time set in accordance with each fluctuation pattern described in FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control process timer has timed out. (Step S603). If the effect control process timer has timed out (step S603; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value of the effect control process timer for the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S532, and effects The control process timer is started (step S604), and the rendering device control process is executed according to the contents of the next process data (step S605).

  After executing the process of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 executes reach history display effect (step S605-1). The reach history display effect in step S605-1 is processing for notifying the player of the reach history using the rendering device. The effect device is, for example, a movable member provided in the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model. That is, in the reach history display effect, the image display using the image display device 5, the sound output using the speaker 8, the lighting display using the lamp 9, the operation of the movable member of the effect model alone or in combination Shall be implemented. In the present embodiment, a case of displaying an image for informing the reach history on the image display device 5 will be described as an example.

  The effect device control process of step S605 and the effect device control process of the reach history display effect of step S605-1 are to start execution of effects according to the respective process data, and the process timer is timed out and the next It is assumed that the process is repeatedly performed until the rendering device control process based on the process data of is started. That is, when the effect control process timer has not timed out in the process of step S603, the effect device control process of step S605 at which the process is started is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, when the effect control process timer has not timed out (step S603; NO), or after executing the processing of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S606) ). When the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S606; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special drawing (step S607), While the variable display is performed, the effect processing is ended.
On the other hand, when the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (step S606; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display effect process without updating the value of the effect process flag.
This is the end of the description of the variable display effect processing using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the special-character-per-wait process will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the special figure-per-wait process executed in step S173 of FIG. In special processing per special drawing shown in FIG. 36, CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the symbol determination designation command reception flag is set (step S720). If it is determined that the symbol determination designating command reception flag is not set (step S720; NO), the CPU for effect control 120 ends the special figure winning waiting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol determination designating command reception flag is set (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the symbol determination designating command reception flag (step S721), and the stop display of the determined decoration symbol is displayed. (Step S722). After executing the processing of step S722, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the finalized decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723). If it is determined that the determined decoration symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S723: NO), the CPU for effect control 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S 726), the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the finalized decoration symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S730). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received. If it is determined that the hit start designation command reception flag is not set (step S730; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure hit waiting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the hit start designation command reception flag (step S731).

  After executing the process of step S731, the effect control CPU 120 executes a reach history clear process of clearing the reach history (step S732). The reach history clear process of step S732 is a process of clearing the reach history updated in the reach history update process of step S53253 of the reach effect type determination in step S5325 of FIG. That is, when the finalized decoration symbol becomes a big hit symbol (step S723; YES) in the waiting process (step S173) for the special figure, the reach history recorded in the ST state is cleared.

After executing the process of step S732, the CPU for effect control 120 sets fanfare effect (step S733), and updates the value of the effect process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit start process (step S174) (step S734) The special-image-per-wait process (step S173) ends.
This is the end of the description of the special figure per-wait processing using FIG.

Next, the reach history display displayed on the image display device 5 will be described using FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a first display example of reach history display.
FIGS. 37A to 37L show the reach history displayed on the image display device 5 in time series. In FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (K), the reach history display 5HR is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 in the figure. The reach history display 5HR displays the implementation status of the effect of Super Reach A, the reach history display 5 HRA displays whether or not the effect of Super Reach B has been performed, and the effect of Super Reach C is performed. It has reach history display 5HRC which displays a situation, and reach history display 5HRD which displays the implementation situation of the production of super reach D. The reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD in the present embodiment are executing super reach of each reach effect type as the implementation status of the super reach of each reach effect type. The display mode which shows that it is and the case where the display mode which shows that the super reach of each reach production classification has been implemented (the effect is complete | finished) can be performed. By notifying that the super reach of each reach effect type has been implemented, the player can recognize the super reach of the unimplemented reach effect type, so that it is possible to improve the curiosity, By notifying the reach effect type of the super reach being carried out, the player can recognize the reach effect type of the super reach which has been newly implemented, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

FIG. 37A shows that the reach history display 5HR is displayed in the case where the effect of super reach has not been executed even once in the ST state. The reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD respectively indicate display states notifying that the reach effect type of the super reach (A to D) is not implemented. In this embodiment, the case where the character of A-D is displayed on a white background is illustrated as a display mode which alert | reports that each reach production classification is not implemented. However, the method of informing that each reach effect type is not implemented is not limited to this. For example, the color of the letters A to D, the density of the letters, the shape of the letters, etc. may be changed according to the implementation situation.
In the image display device 5, the decorative symbols in the variable display are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. That is, FIG. 37 (A) shows that the decorative symbol is being changed in the situation where the effect of super reach has not been executed even once after the ST state.

In FIG. 37B, from the display shown in FIG. 37A, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R display "7" as a stop symbol and the decorative symbol display area 5C is in a reach state in which variable display is in progress. It is a figure which is displayed (not shown), and after that, it is shown that small symbols 5KL, 5KC, and 5KR are displayed in a reach state. It is assumed that an image based on reach effect of which the reach effect type is super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5.
In the reach history display 5HRB, a shaded area is displayed to notify that the reach effect type of the super reach B is being implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize the reach effect type currently being implemented. The reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are displayed to notify that the reach effect type has not been implemented, as in FIG. 37 (A).

  FIG. 37 (C) is a diagram showing that the effect of the reach effect type of super reach B ends from the display shown in FIG. 37 (B) and the decorative symbol displays a lose. The display of the reach history display 5HR is the same as that shown in FIG. 37 (B). In addition, the effect of super reach B may include the display of the stopped decorative pattern.

FIG. 37 (D) is a diagram showing that the display is changed from the display shown in FIG. 37 (C) and the symbol is again in the variable display. In FIG. 37D, the reach history display 5 HRB displays a circle indicating that the reach effect type of the super reach B has been implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize the implemented reach effect type.
In addition, the display which alert | reports that reach production classification has been implemented is not limited to the display of a circle. For example, instead of displaying a circle, an x may be displayed. In addition, the display may be made such that the implemented reach effect type is erased or filled. Moreover, you may display so that the square frame by which reach production classification is displayed may be filled up.
Moreover, although the case where shading is displayed also when alerting | reporting the implemented reach production classification is illustrated in this embodiment, it is good also as a display without shading.

FIG.37 (E) is a figure which shows that reach production classification is implementing the effect of super reach B, after a decoration symbol displays a reach state from the display shown to FIG. 37 (D). The small figures 5KL, 5KC and 5KR are displayed on the image display device 5 in a reach state.
In the reach history display 5HRA, a shaded area is displayed to notify that the reach effect type of super reach A is being implemented. Similarly to FIG. 37 (D), the reach history display 5HRB displays a circle indicating that the reach effect type of the super reach B has been implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect type currently being implemented is super reach A, and can recognize the implemented reach effect type is super reach B. The reach history display 5HRC and the reach history display 5HRD are displayed to notify that the reach effect type is not implemented.

  FIG. 37 (F) is a diagram showing that the effect of the reach effect type of super reach A is ended from the display shown in FIG. 37 (D) and the decorative pattern displays a lose. The display of the reach history display 5HR is the same as that shown in FIG. In addition, the effect of Super Reach A may include up to the display of the stopped decorative pattern.

  FIG. 37 (G) is a view showing that the display is changed from the display shown in FIG. 37 (F), and the symbol is again in the variable display. In (G) in FIG. 37, in the reach history display 5HRA and the reach history display 5HRB, a circle is displayed to notify that the reach effect types of super reach A and super reach B have been implemented. Therefore, the player can recognize that the implemented reach effect types are super reach A and super reach B.

FIG.37 (H) is a figure which shows that reach production classification is implementing the effect of super reach D, after a decoration symbol displays a reach state from the display shown to FIG. 37 (G). The small figures 5KL, 5KC and 5KR are displayed on the image display device 5 in a reach state.
In the reach history display 5HRD, a shaded area is displayed to notify that the reach effect type of the super reach D is being performed. In reach history display 5HRA and reach history display 5HRB, as in FIG. 37 (D), a circle indicating that the reach effect type of super reach A and super reach B has been performed is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect type currently being implemented is super reach D, and can recognize that the implemented reach effect types are super reach A and super reach B. . The reach history display 5HRC is displayed to notify that the reach effect type has not been implemented.

  FIG. 37 (I) is a diagram showing that the effect of the reach effect type of super reach D ends from the display shown in FIG. 37 (H) and the decorative pattern displays a lose. The display of the reach history display 5HR is the same as that shown in FIG. In addition, the effect of super reach D may include up to the display of the stopped decorative pattern.

  FIG. 37 (J) is a figure which shows that it changed from the display shown to FIG. 37 (I) in the variable display again. In (J) in FIG. 37, reach history display 5 HRA, reach history display 5 HRB, and reach history display 5 HRD notify that the reach effect types of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D have been implemented. A circle is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the implemented reach effect types are Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D.

FIG. 37 (K) is a diagram showing that the reach production type is carrying out the effect of the super reach C after the decorative symbol displays the reach state from the display shown in FIG. 37 (J). The small figures 5KL, 5KC and 5KR are displayed on the image display device 5 in a reach state.
In the reach history display 5HRC, a shaded area is displayed to notify that the reach effect type of the super reach C is being performed. In reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, and reach history display 5HRD, as in Fig. 37 (J), that the reach effect types of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D have been implemented A circle to notify is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect type currently being implemented is super reach C, and that the implemented reach effect types are super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. It can be recognized.
In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times the super reach is implemented is four. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the big hit is determined by the execution of the super reach C, the interest can be improved. That is, the player can recognize the upper limit number of times and the implementation status of super reach by reach history display 5 HRA, reach history display 5 HRB, reach history display 5 HRC, and reach history display 5 HRD notifying of the state of reach history.

FIG. 37 (L) is a view showing that the decorative symbol has stopped at the big hit from the display shown in FIG. 37 (K). In this embodiment, the case where the display of the reach history display 5HR is erased when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit is illustrated. If the stop symbol is a big hit, the ST state ends and the reach history is cleared.
This is the end of the description of the reach history display displayed on the image display device 5 using FIG.

Next, a display example of the reach history display after power failure recovery will be described using FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a display example of reach history display after power failure recovery.
The reach history display after the power failure recovery illustrated in FIGS. 38A to 38C is set in the reach reach history display setting process of step S5295 in the display restoration process (step S529) of FIG. It is displayed in the process of the reach history display effect in step S605-1 in the variable display effect process (step S172). When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped at the time of the power failure, as described above, the reach history is not backed up in the effect control board 12. On the other hand, in the power failure recovery process (step S520) executed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command from the main board 11, the ST state can be recovered by the gaming state designation command. Therefore, at the time of power failure recovery, it is desirable to restore the reach history display as any display. It is assumed that the blackout restored reach history display exemplified in FIGS. 38A to 38C is displayed regardless of the reach history before the blackout.
Although FIGS. 38A to 38C illustrate the case where the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the display timing of the reach history display is not limited to the display of the decorative symbol being variable.

In FIG. 38A, in reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, and reach history display 5HRD, a circle indicating that each reach effect type has been implemented is displayed. It shows the case of recovery.
When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, the display of the reach history is restored as the super reach effect is performed a predetermined number of times, so that the number of times after recovery from the power failure is greater than the predetermined number. It is possible to prevent the super reach effect from being performed.

  In addition, if any one or more of the reach effect types of super reach A to D have been implemented before a power failure, reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, or reach history display 5HRD If the circle that shows the implementation completion displayed on the is different from before the power failure, or less than before the power failure, the player may feel that the power loss to the jackpot has fallen due to the power failure. .

  In the present embodiment, the player is expected to be more likely to hit the jackpot by restoring all of the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD as already implemented. Deterioration of interest can be prevented by not feeling that the value has fallen.

  However, assuming that the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD have all been implemented, the player is convinced of the jackpot if the next super reach effect is executed. There are times when Therefore, when the reach history display is restored in the display mode illustrated in FIG. 38 (A), the effect of super reach (loss) may be limited when it is not a big hit.

  In FIG. 38 (B), reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC and reach history display 5HRD notify that it is unclear whether each reach effect type has been implemented or not? It shows the case where restoration is made with the mark displayed.

For example, if the implementation statuses displayed in the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD are different before and after the power failure, the player feels that the degree of expectation decreases. In some cases, the interest is reduced.
In the present embodiment, it is informed that it is unclear whether the reach effect type has already been implemented? By displaying the mark, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest, without making the player feel that the expected value for the big hit has dropped.

In FIG. 38C, reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, and reach history display 5HRD are restored in the displayed state informing that each reach effect type is not implemented. The case is shown.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the reach history display is restored as that for which the super reach effect is not being executed, thereby preventing the reach from being executed even once after the recovery, which is interesting. It can improve.

  For example, if any one or more of the reach effect types of super reach A to D have been implemented before a power failure, reach history display 5 HRA, reach history display 5 HRB, reach history display 5 HRC, or reach history display 5 HRD If there are more circles that have already been displayed, the reach history display 5HRA, the reach history display 5HRB, the reach history display 5HRC, and the reach history display 5HRD have all been implemented, but if the jackpot is reached In some cases, interest may decline.

  In the present embodiment, reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRA, by reaching all of reach history display 5HRA, reach history display 5HRB, reach history display 5HRC, and reach history display 5HRD as not implemented. Even if all of the history display 5HRC and the reach history display 5HRD have been implemented, it does not become a big hit and it becomes possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

As described in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 can know the remaining number of fluctuations in the ST state by receiving the command for specifying the number of times of probability variation from the main board 11. The effect control CPU 120 may change the number of displays for notifying that the reach history display 5HR has been performed, according to the remaining number of fluctuations. For example, if the remaining number of changes is 25 or more, the number of displays notifying the implementation of reach history display 5HR is 2; if the remaining number of changes is less than 25 The number of may be three.
This is the end of the description of the display example of the reach history display after power failure recovery using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the variable display not in the reach state will be described. FIG. 39 is a view showing a display example of the variable display not in the reach state, and FIG. 40 is a view showing a display example of the variable display in the reach state. A variable display which does not reach the reach state will be described by comparing FIG. 39 and FIG. The variable display that does not reach the reach state is an effect aspect that is executed when the variation pattern is PA1-1 or PB1-1 as described in FIG. 5E. PA1-1 or PB1-1 in FIG. 5E is determined when the variation counter is within 10 times in the ST state. By the variable display which does not reach the reach state, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time within 10 times of the fluctuation number counter, improve the sense of speed, and improve the interest.

  In FIG. 39 (A), the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. 39 and 40, the reach history display 5HR displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5 is in the ST state, and the operation of the reach history display 5HR is not particularly described.

  In FIG. 39 (B), the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop and display the decorative symbol of the lost. In the decorative pattern, during the transition from the display state of FIG. 39 (A) to the display state of FIG. 39 (B), the same symbols stop in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the decorative symbol display area 5C is variable. It does not take the reach state which becomes being displayed. That is, FIG. 39 (B) shows that the effect mode of "immediate loss" in which the symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are simultaneously stopped is implemented.

  In FIG. 39 (C), the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 again variably display the decorative symbol from the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 39 (B).

  In FIG. 39 (D), the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop and display the decorative symbol of the big hit. In the decorative pattern, the same pattern is stopped in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R during the transition from the display state of FIG. 39 (C) to the display state of FIG. 39 (D), and the decorative symbol display area 5C is variable. It does not take the reach state which becomes being displayed. That is, FIG. 39 (D) shows that the effect mode of "immediate hit" in which the symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop simultaneously is implemented.

  FIG. 40 (A) shows the same display state as FIG. 39 (A). That is, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

  FIG. 40 (B) shows that the same symbol stops in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the decorative symbol display area 5C is in a reach state in which variable display is in progress. The effect mode of the display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 40 implements the effect of an immediate loss or an immediate hit in that the reach state will be between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop symbol. It differs from the presentation aspect of the display of the decorative design shown. After reaching a reach state, a predetermined reach effect may be implemented.

  In FIG. 40 (C), the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop and display the decorative symbol of the lost. FIG.40 (C) is displayed via the presentation mode which shows the reach state of FIG.40 (B) from the display state of FIG. 40 (A). Therefore, it shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is longer than the effect mode shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 40 (D), the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 variably display the decorative symbol from the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 40 (C). The display mode of FIG. 40 (D) is the same as the display mode of FIG. 39 (C).

  FIG. 40E shows that the same symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the decorative symbol display area 5C is in a reach state in which variable display is in progress. The effect mode of the display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 40 (E) is the same as the effect mode of the display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 40 (B), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 40F, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop and display the decorative symbol of the big hit. The display of FIG. 40 (F) is displayed from the display state of FIG. 40 (D) via an effect mode indicating the reach state of FIG. 40 (E). Therefore, it shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is longer than the effect mode shown in FIG.
As described above, when the effect mode of immediate loss shown in FIG. 39 is repeated, the fluctuation time is shortened, so the sense of speed is improved as compared with the effect mode shown in FIG. However, if the shortening effect for shortening the fluctuation time is executed in all the ST times, the effect of the super reach may not be performed, and the interest may decrease. In the present embodiment, the shortening effect can be performed with the first 10 changes after the ST state, and the reach effect can be performed at a predetermined reach timing, so that the interest can be improved.
This is the end of the description of the variable display that is not in the reach state using FIGS. 39 and 40.

As mentioned above, although the game machine in this embodiment was demonstrated, in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention, a change and correction are arbitrary.
In this embodiment, a variable display of identification information is performed, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and after being controlled to the advantageous state. , Special state control means for controlling to a special state, and specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, wherein the specific effect executing means is controlled for the advantageous state Although the case where the specific effect is executed in the special state at the timing according to the above has been described, the gaming machine of this embodiment may be as follows.

For example, in the present embodiment, the reach effect is exemplified as the effect indicating whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state. In the reach effect, after reaching the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is performed. Although the above description has been made, the above-described effect may be implemented before reaching the reach state.
Also, as described above, the specific effect may be a pseudo-sequence effect. In the pseudo-series effect, the pseudo-series fluctuation may be one time or two or more times. Further, the specific effect may be an effect (for example, PA 4-3, 4 or the like) in which the super reach is combined with the pseudo continuous effect described in FIG. 5A.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described where the number of times of ST (the number of positive variations) is a predetermined fixed number of times such as 50 times or 100 times. However, for example, the ST number may be changed under a predetermined condition. In that case, the reach timing described in FIG. 7 may also be changed in accordance with the number of times of ST. For example, when the number of STs is controlled to be either 50 or 100, the reach timing when the number of STs is 100 may be twice that of when the number of STs is 50.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Although the specific effect executing means may limit execution of the specific effect when the timing is not the timing in the special state, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is as follows. It is also good.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a method of restricting the execution of the specific effect, the case of not executing the specific effect is illustrated, but the method of restricting is not limited to this. For example, the ratio at which the specific effect is determined when the reach timing is not reached in the special state may be reduced. In this embodiment, in the variation category determination table shown in FIG. 19B, the rate at which PA4 or PA5 is determined is 0%, for example, by setting the rate at which PA4 is determined to be several percent, for example. In the reach timing shown in FIG. 19C, the rate at which the super reach is executed may be reduced as compared to the variation category determination table to limit the execution of the specific effect.
Further, as a method of restricting the execution of the specific effect, another effect may be executed instead of the specific effect. For example, instead of executing the super reach effect as the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect may be limited by executing the pseudo continuous effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, as a method of restricting the execution of the specific effect, the case where the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not performed when the CPU 103 in the main substrate 11 is not in the special state is determined. However, the method of restricting the execution of the specific effect is not limited to this. For example, the reach timing may be grasped in the effect control board 12, and it may be determined whether to execute the specific effect or the effect other than the specific effect according to the variation pattern from the main substrate 11.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the first specific effect, and the specific effect executing means includes the first specific effect. Although the case where one specific effect or the second specific effect may be executed has been described, the gaming machine of this embodiment may be as follows.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the two specific effects of the first specific effect and the second specific effect are included, but the specific effects are not limited to two types and may be three or more types . For example, the specific effect executing means further includes a third specific effect having a higher degree of expectation than the second specific effect, and the specific effect executing means executes the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect. It may be.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the specific effect performed in the special state may be notified, but the gaming machine of the present embodiment is as follows. Good.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as the notification of the specific effect performed in the special state, the case of displaying the reach history to the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the notification of the specific effect is the reach to the image display device 5 Display of history, sound output of reach history using the speaker 8, lighting display of reach history using the lamp 9, and operations indicating the reach history of the movable member of the effect model may be executed singly or in combination . Furthermore, although the notification of the specific effect is exemplified during ST in the variable display or stop display of the decorative symbol in the ST state, the timing of the notification of the specific effect is not limited thereto. For example, a two-dimensional code representing a specific effect executed from the setting screen displayed on the image display 5 after the game is over may be displayed on the image display 5 and notified.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the execution of the specific effect performed and notified in the special state may be limited, but the gaming machine of the present embodiment is as follows. It may be one.

Although the case where the specific effect performed and notified was not performed was illustrated as a method of restricting execution of a specific effect in this embodiment, the method of restricting execution of a specific effect is not limited to this. For example, the number of times of execution of the specific effect performed and notified may be limited. For example, when the number of times of execution of the predetermined specific effect is limited to two, the third execution may be limited.
Further, in the present embodiment, as a method of restricting the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect not selected from among the specific effects is drawn and executed, but the execution order of the specific effects is determined in advance. By executing the specific effects in the predetermined order, the execution of the specific effects performed and notified may be limited.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the notification of the specific effect may be restored as one in which the specific effect is performed a predetermined number of times. Although the case has been described, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be as follows.

The present embodiment exemplifies the case where the notification of the specific effect is restored as the specific effect is performed a predetermined number of times. However, for example, the number of times of recovery may be varied by lottery.
Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the specific effect restored as illustrated in FIG. 38 exemplifies a case where the display mode is the same as the notification of the normal specific effect, but for example, the restored specific effect is restored. A predetermined display may be displayed to indicate that.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the notification of the specific effect may be restored as one in which the specific effect is not executed. Although explained, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the case has been described where the specific effect may not be executed until the fluctuation of the variable display reaches a predetermined fluctuation number after being controlled to the special state. The gaming machine of the embodiment may be as follows.

  For example, this embodiment exemplifies the case of determining the shortening / non-reach fluctuation pattern of immediate hit or immediate loss without a reach condition as the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined change frequency is reached. Those that do not perform the rendering are not limited to this. For example, a shortening / non-reach fluctuation pattern with reach condition may be determined. Further, non-reach variation patterns (variation categories PA2, PB2) may be determined. Further, the variation pattern of the normal reach (variation category PA3, PB3) may be determined.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is a first jackpot type that executes a specific effect a first number of times, and a second jackpot type that executes a specific effect a second number of times that is greater than the first number. It has been described that the specific effect to be performed first in the second number may be earlier than the specific effect to be initially performed in the first number. The gaming machine of the present embodiment may be as follows.

For example, in the present embodiment, the specific effect performed first in the second number is described as being earlier than the specific effect performed first in the first number, but The specific effect to be performed last in the second number may be a later timing than the specific effect to be performed last in the first number (for example, the last of the jackpot 1 in FIG. 7) The reach timing of the jackpot is the 30th while the last reach timing of the jackpot is the 39th later, etc.
In addition, the comparison of the speed of the timing to execute the specific effect in the first big hit type and the speed of the timing to execute the specific effect in the second big hit type, even if the average value of the reach timing to execute the specific effect For example, the average value of the jackpot 10 in FIG. 7 is (14 + 20 + 39) / 3 ≒ 24 times, and the specific effect is executed at a timing earlier than the 30th jackpot 1 etc.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but various effects such as the apparatus configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine 1, the process shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 The present invention can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score given for use in a game is given, and a given game is given The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by striking a gaming ball enclosed in a gaming machine into a gaming area using a score or a gaming score given by winning a game.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a plurality of types of medals are inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the control lever by the player. Is applied to a slot machine where a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbol is turned according to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination. It is also possible.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control that the variation pattern indicates the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo ream 1 Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer is the first command before reaching reach such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip rendition (in the case where it does not reach, so-called 2) Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before stopping, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type or re-lottery effect (so-called second if it does not reach) It is also possible to transmit a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after stopping. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the change time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer is notified of the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer is made to select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, and when the ratios are different, , A: B = 100%: 0%, and also cases where the proportions are different (ie, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

  In addition, the device configuration of the gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5 do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. In the scope, arbitrary changes and modifications are possible.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player shoots the paid-out gaming ball into the gaming area to play a game. Using the frequency which is the gaming value of the size specified from the record information of the game recording medium such as a card or a membership card, the game score for giving use for the game is given, and the given game score, or The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in a game machine into a game area using a game score provided by winning a game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but a game machine The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine which seals game media such as balls and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  In each of the above embodiments, the gaming machine controlled to the definite changing state after the end of the big hit game is shown based on being determined to the high probability big hit, but it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configurations shown in the above-described embodiments can also be applied to gaming machines that are controlled to a definite change state after the end.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided to perform variable display of plural types of identification information that can be identified respectively, and to display the display result. It is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific display result defined in advance is displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine The game is performed by driving the game ball enclosed in the game area into the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being thrown, and the game score is obtained according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that add. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the size of a game value usable for addition of game scores is recorded, and a game recording The game recording medium processing means may be provided for reading out the record information recorded on the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown that variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified and derives and displays a finalized special symbol as a result of the variable display. It is not limited. For example, the changing special symbol and the determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, it is not necessary to include the determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result among the plurality of types of varying special symbols.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown that performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols that can be identified and derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that results in variable display. It is not limited. For example, the decorative design that changes and the finalized decorative design that is derived and displayed as a variable display result may be different. In other words, it is not necessary to include the finalized decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as the variable display result among the plurality of types of changing decorative symbols.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 5 HL ... first start winning memory display area 5HR ... second starting winning memory display area 5 H ... start winning Memory display area 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8 ... speaker 9 ... lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A ... 1st starting opening switch 22B ... 2nd starting opening switch 23 ... count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (4)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect ;
Equipped with
The game control means
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of variable display as any of a plurality of types of variable display patterns ;
Including
The presentation control means is whether or not the specific effect and suggests either controlled by the advantageous condition, and special effect repeating predetermined effect, it is possible to execute,
The gaming state control means
Controllable to any one of a plurality of types of said advantageous states,
It can be controlled to a predetermined state after the end of the advantageous state,
The variable display pattern determination unit changes the variable display pattern to a specific variable display pattern capable of executing the specific effect at different timings according to the type of the advantageous state in the predetermined state after the advantageous state is ended. Determinable,
The presentation control means, when the variable display pattern in a predetermined state is determined to the specific variable display pattern, said a special effect without the specific effect, the a special effect without the specific effect, any It is possible to decide what to do ,
A game machine characterized by Notification means capable of notifying in a mode capable of specifying the type of the specific effect to be executed in the predetermined state;
Equipped with
The notification means can notify so that the type of the specific effect can be specified even after the end of the specific effect.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that. When the power supply is stopped in the predetermined state, the notification means can notify in a mode that the type of the specific effect can not be specified at the time of recovery after the stop.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, characterized in that. The effect control means is
In the predetermined state after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to execute the number of the special effects according to the type of the advantageous state,
When the specific effect of the specified number of times is performed in the predetermined state, the first specific effect is performed earlier than when the specific effect of the predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times is performed in the predetermined state. Is feasible,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that.

Images